S25FL512SAGBHMC13 [INFINEON]

Quad SPI Flash;
S25FL512SAGBHMC13
型号: S25FL512SAGBHMC13
厂家: Infineon    Infineon
描述:

Quad SPI Flash

文件: 总161页 (文件大小:3729K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
S25FL512S  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Features  
• CMOS 3.0 V Core with versatile I/O  
• SPI with Multi-I/O  
• Density  
- 512 Mb (64 MB)  
• SPI  
- SPI Clock polarity and phase modes 0 and 3  
- DDR option  
- Extended Addressing: 32-bit address  
- Serial Command set and footprint compatible with  
S25FL-A, S25FL-K, and S25FL-P SPI families  
- Multi I/O Command set and footprint compatible with the  
S25FL-P SPI family  
• READ Commands  
- Normal, Fast, Dual, Quad, Fast DDR, Dual DDR, Quad DDR  
- AutoBoot - power up or reset and execute a Normal or Quad read command automatically at a preselected  
address  
- Common Flash Interface (CFI) data for configuration information.  
• Programming (1.5 MBps)  
- 512-byte Page Programming buffer  
- Quad-Input Page Programming (QPP) for slow clock systems  
- Automatic ECC -internal hardware Error Correction Code generation with single bit error correction  
• Erase (0.5 to 0.65 MBps)  
- Uniform 256-KB sectors  
• Cycling Endurance  
- 100,000 Program-Erase Cycles, minimum  
• Data Retention  
- 20-Year Data Retention, minimum  
• Security Features  
- OTP array of 1024 bytes  
- Block Protection:  
• Status Register bits to control protection against program or erase of a contiguous range of sectors.  
• Hardware and software control options  
- Advanced Sector Protection (ASP)  
• Individual sector protection controlled by boot code or password  
• Infineon® 65 nm MirrorBitTechnology with EclipseArchitecture  
• Core supply voltage: 2.7 V to 3.6 V  
• I/O supply voltage: 1.65 V to 3.6 V  
- SO16 and FBGA packages  
• Temperature range:  
- Industrial (–40 °C to +85 °C)  
Datasheet  
www.infineon.com  
Please read the Important Notice and Warnings at the end of this document  
page 1 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Features  
- Industrial Plus (–40 °C to +105 °C)  
- Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 3 (–40 °C to +85 °C)  
- Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 2 (–40 °C to +105 °C)  
- Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 1 (–40 °C to +125 °C)  
• Packages (all Pb-free)  
- 16-pin SOIC (300 mil)  
- 24-BGA (6 × 8 mm)  
• 5 × 5 ball (FAB024) and 4 × 6 ball (FAC024) footprint options  
- Known Good Die and Known Tested Die  
Datasheet  
2 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Logic block diagram  
Logic block diagram  
CS#  
SCK  
SRAM  
MirrorBit Array  
SI/IO0  
SO/IO1  
WP#/IO2  
Y Decoders  
Data Latch  
I/O  
Control  
Logic  
HOLD#/IO3  
Data Path  
RESET#  
Performance summary  
Maximum read rates with the same core and I/O voltage (VIO = VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V)  
Clock rate  
Command  
MBps  
(MHz)  
50  
Read  
6.25  
16.6  
26  
Fast Read  
Dual Read  
Quad Read  
133  
104  
104  
52  
Maximum read rates with lower I/O voltage (VIO = 1.65 V to 2.7 V, VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V)  
Clock rate  
Command  
MBps  
(MHz)  
50  
Read  
6.25  
8.25  
16.5  
33  
Fast Read  
Dual Read  
Quad Read  
66  
66  
66  
Maximum read rates DDR (VIO = VCC = 3 V to 3.6 V)  
Command  
Clock rate  
(MHz)  
MBps  
Fast Read DDR  
Dual Read DDR  
Quad Read DDR  
80  
80  
80  
20  
40  
80  
Typical program and erase rates  
Operation  
KBps  
1500  
500  
Page Programming (512-byte page buffer - Uniform Sector Option)  
256-KB Logical Sector Erase (Uniform Sector Option)  
Datasheet  
3 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Performance summary  
Current consumption  
Operation  
Clock rate (MHz)  
16 (max)  
Serial Read 50 MHz  
Serial Read 133 MHz  
Quad Read 104 MHz  
Program  
Erase  
Standby  
33 (max)  
61 (max)  
100 (max)  
100 (max)  
0.07 (typ)  
Datasheet  
4 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Table of contents  
Table of contents  
Features ...........................................................................................................................................1  
Logic block diagram ..........................................................................................................................3  
Performance summary ......................................................................................................................3  
Table of contents...............................................................................................................................5  
1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................7  
1.1 General description ................................................................................................................................................7  
1.2 Migration notes .......................................................................................................................................................8  
1.3 Glossary .................................................................................................................................................................10  
Hardware interface..........................................................................................................................11  
2 Signal descriptions .......................................................................................................................12  
2.1 Input/Output summary ........................................................................................................................................12  
2.2 Address and data configuration...........................................................................................................................12  
2.3 RESET#...................................................................................................................................................................13  
2.4 Serial clock (SCK) ..................................................................................................................................................13  
2.5 Chip select (CS#) ...................................................................................................................................................13  
2.6 Serial input (SI) / I/O0 ...........................................................................................................................................13  
2.7 Serial output (SO) / I/O1 .......................................................................................................................................14  
2.8 Write protect (WP#) / I/O2.....................................................................................................................................14  
2.9 Hold (HOLD#) / I/O3 ..............................................................................................................................................14  
2.10 Core voltage supply (VCC) ...................................................................................................................................15  
2.11 Versatile I/O power supply (VIO) .........................................................................................................................15  
2.12 Supply and signal ground (VSS)..........................................................................................................................15  
2.13 Not connected (NC) ............................................................................................................................................15  
2.14 Reserved for future use (RFU).............................................................................................................................15  
2.15 Do not use (DNU).................................................................................................................................................15  
2.16 Block diagrams ...................................................................................................................................................16  
3 Signal protocols............................................................................................................................17  
3.1 SPI clock modes ....................................................................................................................................................17  
3.2 Command protocol...............................................................................................................................................18  
3.3 Interface states .....................................................................................................................................................23  
3.4 Configuration register effects on the interface ...................................................................................................28  
3.5 Data protection.....................................................................................................................................................28  
4 Electrical specifications.................................................................................................................30  
4.1 Absolute maximum ratings ..................................................................................................................................30  
4.2 Thermal resistance ...............................................................................................................................................30  
4.3 Operating ranges ..................................................................................................................................................30  
4.4 Power-up and Power-down .................................................................................................................................32  
4.5 DC characteristics .................................................................................................................................................34  
5 Timing specifications ....................................................................................................................36  
5.1 Key to switching waveforms.................................................................................................................................36  
5.2 AC test conditions .................................................................................................................................................36  
5.3 Reset ......................................................................................................................................................................37  
5.4 SDR AC characteristics..........................................................................................................................................40  
5.5 DDR AC characteristics .........................................................................................................................................44  
6 Physical interface .........................................................................................................................46  
6.1 SOIC 16-lead package...........................................................................................................................................46  
6.2 FAB024 24-ball BGA package ................................................................................................................................................................ 48  
6.3 FAC024 24-ball BGA package ................................................................................................................................................................ 50  
Software interface...........................................................................................................................52  
7 Address space maps ......................................................................................................................53  
7.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................53  
Datasheet  
5 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Table of contents  
7.2 Flash memory array ..............................................................................................................................................53  
7.3 ID-CFI address space.............................................................................................................................................53  
7.4 JEDEC JESD216 serial flash discoverable parameters (SFDP) space. ................................................................54  
7.5 OTP address space................................................................................................................................................54  
7.6 Registers................................................................................................................................................................55  
8 Data protection ............................................................................................................................66  
8.1 Secure silicon region (OTP) ..................................................................................................................................66  
8.2 Write enable command ........................................................................................................................................66  
8.3 Block protection ...................................................................................................................................................67  
8.4 Advanced sector protection .................................................................................................................................68  
9 Commands ...................................................................................................................................72  
9.1 Command set summary .......................................................................................................................................73  
9.2 Identification commands .....................................................................................................................................79  
9.3 Register access commands ..................................................................................................................................81  
9.4 Read memory array commands...........................................................................................................................90  
9.5 Program flash array commands.........................................................................................................................106  
9.6 Erase flash array commands ..............................................................................................................................109  
9.7 One time program array commands..................................................................................................................113  
9.8 Advanced sector protection commands ...........................................................................................................114  
9.9 Reset commands ................................................................................................................................................119  
9.10 Embedded algorithm performance tables ......................................................................................................120  
10 Data integrity ........................................................................................................................... 121  
10.1 Erase endurance ...............................................................................................................................................121  
10.2 Data retention ...................................................................................................................................................121  
11 Software interface reference ..................................................................................................... 122  
11.1 Command summary .........................................................................................................................................122  
11.2 Serial flash discoverable parameters (SFDP) address map............................................................................124  
11.3 Device ID and common flash interface (ID-CFI) address map ........................................................................128  
11.4 Device ID and common flash interface (ID-CFI) ASO map — Automotive only ..............................................149  
11.5 Registers............................................................................................................................................................149  
11.6 Initial delivery state ..........................................................................................................................................154  
12 Ordering information ................................................................................................................ 155  
12.1 Valid combinations — Standard.......................................................................................................................156  
12.2 Valid combinations — Automotive Grade / AEC-Q100 ....................................................................................156  
Revision history ............................................................................................................................ 157  
Datasheet  
6 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Overview  
1
Overview  
1.1  
General description  
The Infineon S25FL512S device is a flash non-volatile memory product using:  
• MirrorBittechnology - that stores two data bits in each memory array transistor  
• Eclipse architecture - that dramatically improves program and erase performance  
• 65 nm process lithography  
This device connects to a host system via an SPI. Traditional SPI single bit serial input and output (Single I/O or  
SIO) is supported as well as optional two bit (Dual I/O or DIO) and four bit (Quad I/O or QIO) serial commands.  
This multiple width interface is called SPI Multi-I/O or MIO. In addition, the FL-S family adds support for Double  
Data Rate (DDR) read commands for SIO, DIO, and QIO that transfer address and read data on both edges of the  
clock.  
The Eclipse architecture features a Page Programming Buffer that allows up to 256 words (512 bytes) to be  
programmed in one operation, resulting in faster effective programming and erase than prior generation SPI  
program or erase algorithms.  
Executing code directly from flash memory is often called Execute-In-Place or XIP. By using FL-S devices at the  
higher clock rates supported, with QIO or DDR-QIO commands, the instruction read transfer rate can match or  
exceed traditional parallel interface, asynchronous, NOR flash memories while reducing signal count dramati-  
cally.  
The S25FL512S product offers high densities coupled with the flexibility and fast performance required by a  
variety of embedded applications. It is ideal for code shadowing, XIP, and data storage.  
Datasheet  
7 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Overview  
1.2  
Migration notes  
1.2.1  
Features comparison  
The S25FL512S device is command set and footprint compatible with prior generation FL-K and FL-P families.  
Table 1  
FL generations comparison  
Parameter  
Technology Node  
Architecture  
Release Date  
Density  
FL-K  
90 nm  
Floating Gate  
In Production  
4 Mb–128 Mb  
x1, x2, x4  
FL-P  
90 nm  
MirrorBit  
FL-S  
65 nm  
MirrorBit Eclipse  
In Production  
512 Mb  
In Production  
32 Mb–256 Mb  
x1, x2, x4  
Bus Width  
x1, x2, x4  
Supply Voltage  
2.7 V–3.6 V  
6 MBps (50 MHz)  
13 MBps (104 MHz)  
26 MBps (104 MHz)  
52 MBps (104 MHz)  
2.7 V–3.6 V  
5 MBps (40 MHz)  
13 MBps (104 MHz)  
20 MBps (80 MHz)  
40 MBps (80 MHz)  
2.7 V–3.6 V / 1.65 V–3.6 VVIO  
6 MBps (50 MHz)  
17 MBps (133 MHz)  
26 MBps (104 MHz)  
52 MBps (104 MHz)  
20 MBps (80 MHz)  
40 MBps (80 MHz)  
80 MBps (80 MHz)  
512B  
NormalReadSpeed(SDR)  
Fast Read Speed (SDR)  
Dual Read Speed (SDR)  
Quad Read Speed (SDR)  
Fast Read Speed (DDR)  
Dual Read Speed (DDR)  
Quad Read Speed (DDR)  
Program Buffer Size  
Erase Sector Size  
256B  
4 KB / 32 KB / 64 KB  
4 KB  
256B  
64 KB / 256 KB  
4 KB  
256 KB  
Parameter Sector Size  
Sector Erase Time (typ.)  
30 ms (4 KB), 150 ms (64  
kB)  
500 ms (64 kB)  
520 ms (256 kB)  
Page Programming Time  
(typ.)  
700 µs (256B)  
1500 µs (256B)  
340 µs (512B)  
OTP  
Advanced Sector  
Protection  
768B (3 x 256B)  
No  
506B  
No  
1024B  
Yes  
Auto Boot Mode  
Erase Suspend/Resume  
Program  
Suspend/Resume  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Operating Temperature  
–40 °C to +85 °C  
–40 °C to +85 °C / +105 °C –40 °C to +85 °C / +105 °C  
Notes  
1. 256B program page option only for 128-Mb and 256-Mb density FL-S devices.  
2. FL-P column indicates FL129P MIO SPI device (for 128-Mb density).  
3. 64 kB sector erase option only for 128-Mb/256-Mb density FL-P and FL-S devices.  
4. FL-K family devices can erase 4-kB sectors in groups of 32 kB or 64 kB.  
5. Refer to individual datasheets for further details.  
Datasheet  
8 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Overview  
1.2.2  
Known differences from prior generations  
Error reporting  
1.2.2.1  
Prior generation FL memories either do not have error status bits or do not set them if program or erase is  
attempted on a protected sector. The FL-S family does have error reporting status bits for program and erase  
operations. These can be set when there is an internal failure to program or erase or when there is an attempt to  
program or erase a protected sector. In either case the program or erase operation did not complete as requested  
by the command.  
1.2.2.2  
Secure silicon region (OTP)  
The size and format (address map) of the One Time Program area is different from prior generations. The method  
for protecting each portion of the OTP area is different. For additional details see “Secure silicon region (OTP)”  
on page 66.  
1.2.2.3  
Configuration register Freeze bit  
The configuration register Freeze bit CR1[0], locks the state of the Block Protection bits as in prior generations.  
In the FL-S family it also locks the state of the configuration register TBPARM bit CR1[2], TBPROT bit CR1[5], and  
the Secure Silicon Region (OTP) area.  
1.2.2.4  
Sector erase commands  
The command for erasing an 8-KB area (two 4-KB sectors) is not supported.  
The command for erasing a 4-KB sector is not supported in the 512-Mb density FL-S device.  
The erase command for 64-KB sectors is not supported in the 512-Mb density FL-S device.  
1.2.2.5  
Deep power-down  
The Deep Power Down (DPD) function is not supported in FL-S family devices.  
The legacy DPD (B9h) command code is instead used to enable legacy SPI memory controllers, that can issue the  
former DPD command, to access a new bank address register. The bank address register allows SPI memory  
controllers that do not support more than 24 bits of address, the ability to provide higher order address bits for  
commands, as needed to access the larger address space of the 512-Mb density FL-S device. For additional infor-  
mation see “Extended address” on page 53.  
1.2.2.6  
New features  
The FL-S family introduces several new features to SPI category memories:  
• Extended address for access to higher memory density.  
• AutoBoot for simpler access to boot code following power up.  
• Enhanced High Performance read commands using mode bits to eliminate the overhead of SIO instructions  
when repeating the same type of read command.  
• Multiple options for initial read latency (number of dummy cycles) for faster initial access time or higher clock  
rate read commands.  
• DDR read commands for SIO, DIO, and QIO.  
• Automatic ECC for enhanced data integrity.  
• Advanced Sector Protection for individually controlling the protection of each sector. This is very similar to the  
Advanced Sector Protection feature found in several other Infineon parallel interface NOR memory families.  
Datasheet  
9 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Overview  
1.3  
Glossary  
Table 2  
Glossary  
Item  
Description  
All information transferred between the host system and memory during one  
period while CS# is low. This includes the instruction (sometimes called an  
operation code or opcode) and any required address, mode bits, latency cycles,  
or data.  
Two die stacked within the same package to increase the memory capacity of a  
single package. Often also referred to as a Multi-Chip Package (MCP).  
Command  
DDP  
(Dual Die Package)  
DDR  
When input and output are latched on every edge of SCK.  
(Double Data Rate)  
ECC Unit = 16 byte aligned and length data groups in the main Flash array and  
OTP array, each of which has its own hidden ECC syndrome to enable error  
correction on each group.  
ECC  
The name for a type of Electrical Erase Programmable Read Only Memory  
(EEPROM) that erases large blocks of memory bits in parallel, making the erase  
operation much faster than early EEPROM.  
Flash  
High  
A signal voltage level VIH or a logic level representing a binary one (1).  
The 8 bit code indicating the function to be performed by a command (sometimes  
called an operation code or opcode). The instruction is always the first 8 bits  
transferred from host system to the memory in any command.  
A signal voltage level VIL or a logic level representing a binary zero (0).  
Instruction  
Low  
Generally the right most bit, with the lowest order of magnitude value, within a  
group of bits of a register or data value.  
LSb  
(Least Significant Bit)  
Generally the left most bit, with the highest order of magnitude value, within a  
group of bits of a register or data value.  
MSb  
(Most Significant Bit)  
LSB  
The right most byte, within a group of bytes.  
(Least Significant Byte)  
MSB  
The left most bit, within a group of bytes.  
(Most Significant Byte)  
Non-volatile  
No power is needed to maintain data stored in the memory.  
The alphanumeric string specifying the memory device type, density, package,  
factory non-volatile configuration, etc. used to select the desired device.  
OPN  
(Ordering Part Number)  
Page  
PCB  
512 bytes aligned and length group of data.  
Printed Circuit Board.  
Are in the format: Register_name[bit_number] or Regis-  
ter_name[bit_range_MSb: bit_range_LSb].  
Register Bit References  
SDR  
When input is latched on the rising edge and output on the falling edge of SCK.  
(Single Data Rate)  
Sector  
Erase unit size 256 KB.  
An operation that changes data within volatile or non-volatile registers bits or  
non-volatile flash memory. When changing non-volatile data, an erase and repro-  
gramming of any unchanged non-volatile data is done, as part of the operation,  
such that the non-volatile data is modified by the write operation, in the same  
way that volatile data is modified – as a single operation. The non-volatile data  
appears to the host system to be updated by the single write command, without  
the need for separate commands for erase and reprogram of adjacent, but  
unaffected data.  
Write  
Datasheet  
10 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Hardware interface  
Hardware interface  
Serial peripheral interface with multiple input / output (SPI-MIO)  
Many memory devices connect to their host system with separate parallel control, address, and data signals that  
require a large number of signal connections and larger package size. The large number of connections increase  
power consumption due to so many signals switching and the larger package increases cost.  
The S25FL512S device reduces the number of signals for connection to the host system by serially transferring  
all control, address, and data information over 4 to 6 signals. This reduces the cost of the memory package,  
reduces signal switching power, and either reduces the host connection count or frees host connectors for use  
in providing other features.  
The S25FL512S device uses the industry standard single bit Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) and also supports  
optional extension commands for two bit (Dual) and four bit (Quad) wide serial transfers. This multiple width  
interface is called SPI Multi-I/O or SPI-MIO.  
Datasheet  
11 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal descriptions  
2
Signal descriptions  
2.1  
Input/Output summary  
Table 3  
Signal name  
RESET#  
Signal list  
Type  
Input  
Description  
Hardware reset: Low = device resets and returns to standby state, ready to  
receive a command. The signal has an internal pull-up resistor and may be left  
unconnected in the host system if not used.  
SCK  
CS#  
SI / IO0  
SO / IO1  
WP# / IO2  
Input  
Input  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
Serial clock.  
Chip select.  
Serial input for single bit data commands or IO0 for Dual or Quad commands.  
Serial output for single bit data commands. IO1 for Dual or Quad commands.  
Write protect when not in Quad mode. IO2 in Quad mode. The signal has an  
internal pull-up resistor and may be left unconnected in the host system if not  
used for Quad commands.  
HOLD# / IO3  
I/O  
Hold (pause) serial transfer in single bit or Dual data commands. IO3 in Quad-I/O  
mode. The signal has an internal pull-up resistor and may be left unconnected in  
the host system if not used for Quad commands.  
VCC  
VIO  
VSS  
NC  
Supply  
Supply  
Supply  
Unused  
Core power supply.  
Versatile I/O power supply.  
Ground.  
Not connected. No device internal signal is connected to the package connector  
nor is there any future plan to use the connector for a signal. The connection may  
safely be used for routing space for a signal on a Printed Circuit Board (PCB).  
However, any signal connected to an NC must not have voltage levels higher than  
VIO.  
RFU  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved for future use. No device internal signal is currently connected to the  
package connector but there is potential future use of the connector for a signal.  
It is recommended to not use RFU connectors for PCB routing channels so that the  
PCB may take advantage of future enhanced features in compatible footprint  
devices.  
Do not use. A device internal signal may be connected to the package connector.  
The connection may be used by Infineon for test or other purposes and is not  
intended for connection to any host system signal. Any DNU signal related  
function will be inactive when the signal is at VIL. The signal has an internal  
pull-down resistor and may be left unconnected in the host system or may be tied  
to VSS. Do not use these connections for PCB signal routing channels. Do not  
connect any host system signal to this connection.  
DNU  
2.2  
Address and data configuration  
Traditional SPI single bit wide commands (Single or SIO) send information from the host to the memory only on  
the SI signal. Data may be sent back to the host serially on the Serial Output (SO) signal.  
Dual or Quad Output commands send information from the host to the memory only on the SI signal. Data will  
be returned to the host as a sequence of bit pairs on IO0 and IO1 or four bit (nibble) groups on IO0, IO1, IO2, and  
IO3.  
Dual or Quad Input/Output (I/O) commands send information from the host to the memory as bit pairs on IO0  
and IO1 or four bit (nibble) groups on IO0, IO1, IO2, and IO3. Data is returned to the host similarly as bit pairs on  
IO0 and IO1 or four bit (nibble) groups on IO0, IO1, IO2, and IO3.  
Datasheet  
12 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal descriptions  
2.3  
RESET#  
The RESET# input provides a hardware method of resetting the device to standby state, ready for receiving a  
command. When RESET# is driven to logic low (VIL) for at least a period of tRP, the device:  
• terminates any operation in progress,  
• tristates all outputs,  
• resets the volatile bits in the Configuration Register,  
• resets the volatile bits in the Status Registers,  
• resets the Bank Address Register to zero,  
• loads the Program Buffer with all ones,  
• reloads all internal configuration information necessary to bring the device to standby mode,  
• and resets the internal Control Unit to standby state.  
RESET# causes the same initialization process as is performed when power comes up and requires tPU time.  
RESET# may be asserted low at any time. To ensure data integrity any operation that was interrupted by a  
hardware reset should be reinitiated once the device is ready to accept a command sequence.  
When RESET# is first asserted Low, the device draws ICC1 (50 MHz value) during tPU. If RESET# continues to be held  
at VSS the device draws CMOS standby current (ISB).  
RESET# has an internal pull-up resistor and may be left unconnected in the host system if not used.  
The RESET# input is not available on all packages options. When not available the RESET# input of the device is  
tied to the inactive state, inside the package.  
2.4  
Serial clock (SCK)  
This input signal provides the synchronization reference for the SPI interface. Instructions, addresses, or data  
input are latched on the rising edge of the SCK signal. Data output changes after the falling edge of SCK, in SDR  
commands, and after every edge in DDR commands.  
2.5  
Chip select (CS#)  
The chip select signal indicates when a command for the device is in process and the other signals are relevant  
for the memory device. When the CS# signal is at the logic high state, the device is not selected and all input  
signals are ignored and all output signals are high impedance. Unless an internal Program, Erase or Write  
Registers (WRR) embedded operation is in progress, the device will be in the Standby Power mode. Driving the  
CS# input to logic low state enables the device, placing it in the Active Power mode. After Power-up, a falling edge  
on CS# is required prior to the start of any command.  
CS# toggle with no CLK and Data is considered as non-valid. The Flash should not be selected (CS# low with no  
CLK and Data) when it’s not being addressed. This is considered as a spec violation and can eventually cause the  
device to remain in busy state (SR1=0x03) after an embedded operation (program/erase/etc.)  
2.6  
Serial input (SI) / I/O0  
This input signal is used to transfer data serially into the device. It receives instructions, addresses, and data to  
be programmed. Values are latched on the rising edge of serial SCK clock signal.  
SI becomes I/O0 - an input and output during Dual and Quad commands for receiving instructions, addresses,  
and data to be programmed (values latched on rising edge of serial SCK clock signal) as well as shifting out data  
(on the falling edge of SCK, in SDR commands, and on every edge of SCK, in DDR commands).  
Datasheet  
13 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal descriptions  
2.7  
Serial output (SO) / I/O1  
This output signal is used to transfer data serially out of the device. Data is shifted out on the falling edge of the  
serial SCK clock signal.  
SO becomes IO1 - an input and output during Dual and Quad commands for receiving addresses, and data to be  
programmed (values latched on rising edge of serial SCK clock signal) as well as shifting out data (on the falling  
edge of SCK, in SDR commands, and on every edge of SCK, in DDR commands).  
2.8  
Write protect (WP#) / I/O2  
When WP# is driven Low (VIL), during a WRR command and while the Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) bit of  
the Status Register is set to a 1, it is not possible to write to the Status and Configuration Registers. This prevents  
any alteration of the Block Protect (BP2, BP1, BP0) and TBPROT bits of the Status Register. As a consequence, all  
the data bytes in the memory area that are protected by the Block Protect and TBPROT bits, are also hardware  
protected against data modification if WP# is Low during a WRR command.  
The WP# function is not available when the Quad mode is enabled (CR[1]=1). The WP# function is replaced by IO2  
for input and output during Quad mode for receiving addresses, and data to be programmed (values are latched  
on rising edge of the SCK signal) as well as shifting out data (on the falling edge of SCK, in SDR commands, and  
on every edge of SCK, in DDR commands).  
WP# has an internal pull-up resistor; when unconnected, WP# is at VIH and may be left unconnected in the host  
system if not used for Quad mode.  
2.9  
Hold (HOLD#) / I/O3  
The Hold (HOLD#) signal is used to pause any serial communications with the device without deselecting the  
device or stopping the serial clock.  
To enter the Hold condition, the device must be selected by driving the CS# input to the logic low state. It is  
recommended that the user keep the CS# input low state during the entire duration of the Hold condition. This  
is to ensure that the state of the interface logic remains unchanged from the moment of entering the Hold  
condition. If the CS# input is driven to the logic high state while the device is in the Hold condition, the interface  
logic of the device will be reset. To restart communication with the device, it is necessary to drive HOLD# to the  
logic high state while driving the CS# signal into the logic low state. This prevents the device from going back into  
the Hold condition.  
The Hold condition starts on the falling edge of the Hold (HOLD#) signal, provided that this coincides with SCK  
being at the logic low state. If the falling edge does not coincide with the SCK signal being at the logic low state,  
the Hold condition starts whenever the SCK signal reaches the logic low state. Taking the HOLD# signal to the  
logic low state does not terminate any Write, Program or Erase operation that is currently in progress.  
During the Hold condition, SO is in high impedance and both the SI and SCK input are Don't Care.  
The Hold condition ends on the rising edge of the Hold (HOLD#) signal, provided that this coincides with the SCK  
signal being at the logic low state. If the rising edge does not coincide with the SCK signal being at the logic low  
state, the Hold condition ends whenever the SCK signal reaches the logic low state.  
The HOLD# function is not available when the Quad mode is enabled (CR1[1] =1). The Hold function is replaced  
by I/O3 for input and output during Quad mode for receiving addresses, and data to be programmed (values are  
latched on rising edge of the SCK signal) as well as shifting out data (on the falling edge of SCK, in SDR commands,  
and on every edge of SCK, in DDR commands).  
The HOLD# signal has an internal pull-up resistor and may be left unconnected in the host system if not used for  
Quad mode.  
Datasheet  
14 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal descriptions  
CS#  
SCK  
HOLD#  
Hold Condition  
Standard Use  
Hold Condition  
Non-standard Use  
Valid Input  
Don't Care  
B
Valid Input  
Don't Care  
D
Valid Input  
D
SI_or_IO_(during_input)  
SO_or_IO_(internal)  
SO_or_IO_(external)  
A
A
C
E
E
B
B
C
Figure 1  
HOLD mode operation  
2.10  
Core voltage supply (VCC)  
VCC is the voltage source for all device internal logic. It is the single voltage used for all device internal functions  
including read, program, and erase. The voltage may vary from 2.7V to 3.6V.  
2.11  
Versatile I/O power supply (VIO)  
The Versatile I/O (VIO) supply is the voltage source for all device input receivers and output drivers and allows the  
host system to set the voltage levels that the device tolerates on all inputs and drives on outputs (address,  
control, and I/O signals). The VIO range is 1.65V to VCC. VIO cannot be greater than VCC  
.
For example, a VIO of 1.65 V - 3.6 V allows for I/O at the 1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3 V levels, driving and receiving signals to and  
from other  
1.8 V, 2.5 V or 3 V devices on the same data bus. VIO may be tied to VCC so that interface signals operate at the same  
voltage as the core of the device. VIO is not available in all package options, when not available the VIO supply is  
tied to VCC internal to the package.  
During the rise of power supplies the VIO supply voltage must remain less than or equal to the VCC supply voltage.  
This supply is not available in all package options. For a backward compatible with the SO16 package, the VIO  
supply is tied to VCC inside the package; thus, the I/O will function at VCC level.  
2.12  
Supply and signal ground (VSS)  
VSS is the common voltage drain and ground reference for the device core, input signal receivers, and output  
drivers.  
2.13  
Not connected (NC)  
No device internal signal is connected to the package connector nor is there any future plan to use the connector  
for a signal. The connection may safely be used for routing space for a signal on a Printed Circuit Board (PCB).  
However, any signal connected to an NC must not have voltage levels higher than VIO.  
2.14  
Reserved for future use (RFU)  
No device internal signal is currently connected to the package connector but is there potential future use of the  
connector. It is recommended to not use RFU connectors for PCB routing channels so that the PCB may take  
advantage of future enhanced features in compatible footprint devices.  
2.15  
Do not use (DNU)  
A device internal signal may be connected to the package connector. The connection may be used by Infineon  
for test or other purposes and is not intended for connection to any host system signal. Any DNU signal related  
function will be inactive when the signal is at VIL. The signal has an internal pull-down resistor and may be left  
unconnected in the host system or may be tied to VSS. Do not use these connections for PCB signal routing  
channels. Do not connect any host system signal to these connections.  
Datasheet  
15 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal descriptions  
2.16  
Block diagrams  
HOLD#  
WP#  
HOLD#  
WP#  
SI  
SO  
SI  
SO  
SCK  
SCK  
CS2#  
CS2#  
CS1#  
CS1#  
FL-S  
Flash  
FL-S  
Flash  
SPI  
Bus Master  
Figure 2  
Bus master and memory devices on the SPI bus — Single bit data path  
HOLD#  
HOLD#  
WP#  
IO1  
IO0  
SCK  
WP#  
IO1  
IO0  
SCK  
CS2#  
CS2#  
CS1#  
CS1#  
FL-S  
Flash  
FL-S  
Flash  
SPI  
Bus Master  
Figure 3  
Bus master and memory devices on the SPI bus — Dual bit data path  
IO3  
IO2  
IO3  
IO2  
IO1  
IO1  
IO0  
IO0  
SCK  
SCK  
CS2#  
CS2#  
CS1#  
CS1#  
FL-S  
Flash  
FL-S  
Flash  
SPI  
Bus Master  
Figure 4  
Bus master and memory devices on the SPI bus — Quad bit data path  
Datasheet  
16 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
3
Signal protocols  
SPI clock modes  
3.1  
3.1.1  
Single data rate (SDR)  
The S25FL512S device can be driven by an embedded microcontroller (bus master) in either of the two following  
clocking modes.  
Mode 0 with Clock Polarity (CPOL) = 0 and, Clock Phase (CPHA) = 0  
Mode 3 with CPOL = 1 and, CPHA = 1  
For these two modes, input data into the device is always latched in on the rising edge of the SCK signal and the  
output data is always available from the falling edge of the SCK clock signal.  
The difference between the two modes is the clock polarity when the bus master is in standby mode and not  
transferring any data.  
• SCK will stay at logic low state with CPOL = 0, CPHA = 0  
• SCK will stay at logic high state with CPOL = 1, CPHA = 1  
CPOL=0_CPHA=0_SCK  
CPOL=1_CPHA=1_SCK  
CS#  
SI  
MSB  
SO  
MSB  
Figure 5  
SPI SDR modes supported  
Timing diagrams throughout the remainder of the document are generally shown as both mode 0 and 3 by  
showing SCK as both high and low at the fall of CS#. In some cases a timing diagram may show only mode 0 with  
SCK low at the fall of CS#. In such a case, mode 3 timing simply means clock is high at the fall of CS# so no SCK  
rising edge set up or hold time to the falling edge of CS# is needed for mode 3.  
SCK cycles are measured (counted) from one falling edge of SCK to the next falling edge of SCK. In mode 0 the  
beginning of the first SCK cycle in a command is measured from the falling edge of CS# to the first falling edge of  
SCK because SCK is already low at the beginning of a command.  
3.1.2  
Double data rate (DDR)  
Mode 0 and Mode 3 are also supported for DDR commands. In DDR commands, the instruction bits are always  
latched on the rising edge of clock, the same as in SDR commands. However, the address and input data that  
follow the instruction are latched on both the rising and falling edges of SCK. The first address bit is latched on  
the first rising edge of SCK following the falling edge at the end of the last instruction bit. The first bit of output  
data is driven on the falling edge at the end of the last access latency (dummy) cycle.  
SCK cycles are measured (counted) in the same way as in SDR commands, from one falling edge of SCK to the  
next falling edge of SCK. In mode 0 the beginning of the first SCK cycle in a command is measured from the falling  
edge of CS# to the first falling edge of SCK because SCK is already low at the beginning of a command.  
Datasheet  
17 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
CPOL=0_CPHA=0_SCK  
CPOL=1_CPHA=1_SCK  
CS#  
Read  
Data  
Transfer_Phase  
Instruction  
Inst.7  
Address  
A 3 1 A 3 0  
Mode  
Dummy / DLP  
M 0  
M 6  
M 7  
A0  
SI  
Inst.0  
SO  
D0 D1  
DLP7  
DLP0  
Figure 6  
SPI DDR modes supported  
3.2  
Command protocol  
All communication between the host system and S25FL512S memory device is in the form of units called  
commands.  
All commands begin with an instruction that selects the type of information transfer or device operation to be  
performed. Commands may also have an address, instruction modifier, latency period, data transfer to the  
memory, or data transfer from the memory. All instruction, address, and data information is transferred serially  
between the host system and memory device.  
All instructions are transferred from host to memory as a single bit serial sequence on the SI signal.  
Single bit wide commands may provide an address or data sent only on the SI signal. Data may be sent back to  
the host serially on the SO signal.  
Dual or Quad Output commands provide an address sent to the memory only on the SI signal. Data will be  
returned to the host as a sequence of bit pairs on I/O0 and I/O1 or four bit (nibble) groups on I/O0, I/O1, I/O2, and  
I/O3.  
Dual or Quad Input/Output (I/O) commands provide an address sent from the host as bit pairs on I/O0 and I/O1  
or, four-bit (nibble) groups on I/O0, I/O1, I/O2, and I/O3. Data is returned to the host similarly as bit pairs on I/O0  
and I/O1 or, four bit (nibble) groups on I/O0, I/O1, I/O2, and I/O3.  
Commands are structured as follows:  
• Each command begins with CS# going low and ends with CS# returning high. The memory device is selected by  
the host driving the Chip Select (CS#) signal low throughout a command.  
• The serial clock (SCK) marks the transfer of each bit or group of bits between the host and memory.  
• Each command begins with an 8-bit (byte) instruction. The instruction is always presented only as a single bit  
serial sequence on the Serial Input (SI) signal with one bit transferred to the memory device on each SCK rising  
edge. The instruction selects the type of information transfer or device operation to be performed.  
• The instruction may be stand alone or may be followed by address bits to select a location within one of several  
address spaces in the device. The instruction determines the address space used. The address may be either a  
24-bit or a 32-bit byte boundary, address. The address transfers occur on SCK rising edge, in SDR commands,  
or on every SCK edge, in DDR commands.  
• The width of all transfers following the instruction are determined by the instruction sent. Following transfers  
may continue to be single bit serial on only the SI or Serial Output (SO) signals, they may be done in 2-bit groups  
per (dual) transfer on the I/O0 and I/O1 signals, or they may be done in 4-bit groups per (quad) transfer on the  
I/O0-I/O3 signals. Within the dual or quad groups the least significant bit is on I/O0. More significant bits are  
placed in significance order on each higher numbered I/O signal. Single bits or parallel bit groups are transferred  
in most to least significant bit order.  
• Some instructions send an instruction modifier called mode bits, following the address, to indicate that the  
next command will be of the same type with an implied, rather than an explicit, instruction. The next command  
thus does not provide an instruction byte, only a new address and mode bits. This reduces the time needed to  
Datasheet  
18 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
send each command when the same command type is repeated in a sequence of commands. The mode bit  
transfers occur on SCK rising edge, in SDR commands, or on every SCK edge, in DDR commands.  
• The address or mode bits may be followed by write data to be stored in the memory device or by a read latency  
period before read data is returned to the host.  
• Write data bit transfers occur on SCK rising edge, in SDR commands, or on every SCK edge, in DDR commands.  
• SCK continues to toggle during any read access latency period. The latency may be zero to several SCK cycles  
(also referred to as dummy cycles). At the end of the read latency cycles, the first read data bits are driven from  
the outputs on SCK falling edge at the end of the last read latency cycle. The first read data bits are considered  
transferred to the host on the following SCK rising edge. Each following transfer occurs on the next SCK rising  
edge, in SDR commands, or on every SCK edge, in DDR commands.  
• If the command returns read data to the host, the device continues sending data transfers until the host takes  
the CS# signal high. The CS# signal can be driven high after any transfer in the read data sequence. This will  
terminate the command.  
• At the end of a command that does not return data, the host drives the CS# input high. The CS# signal must go  
high after the eighth bit, of a stand alone instruction or, of the last write data byte that is transferred. That is,  
the CS# signal must be driven high when the number of clock cycles after CS# signal was driven low is an exact  
multiple of eight cycles. If the CS# signal does not go high exactly at the eight SCK cycle boundary of the  
instruction or write data, the command is rejected and not executed.  
• All instruction, address, and mode bits are shifted into the device with the Most Significant Bits (MSb) first. The  
data bits are shifted in and out of the device MSb first. All data is transferred in byte units with the lowest address  
byte sent first. Following bytes of data are sent in lowest to highest byte address order i.e. the byte address  
increments.  
• All attempts to read the flash memory array during a program, erase, or a write cycle (embedded operations)  
are ignored. The embedded operation will continue to execute without any affect. A very limited set of  
commands are accepted during an embedded operation. These are discussed in the individual command  
descriptions.  
• Depending on the command, the time for execution varies. A command to read status information from an  
executing command is available to determine when the command completes execution and whether the  
command was successful.  
3.2.1  
Command sequence examples  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 7  
Stand alone instruction command  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Input Data  
Figure 8  
Single bit wide input command  
Datasheet  
19 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Instruction  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Data1 Data2  
Phase  
Figure 9  
Single bit wide output command  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
Phase  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 31  
Instruction  
1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Address  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Figure 10  
Single bit wide I/O command without latency  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
Phase  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 31  
1 0  
Address  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Data 1  
Instruction  
Dummy Cycles  
Figure 11  
Single bit wide I/O command with latency  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
30 28 26  
31 29 27  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Instruction  
0
1
6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0  
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1  
Phase  
Address  
6 Dummy  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Figure 12  
Dual output command  
Datasheet  
20 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 31  
1 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4  
5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5  
6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6  
7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7  
IO2  
IO3  
Instruction  
Address  
Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5  
...  
Phase  
Figure 13  
Quad output command without latency  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 30  
31  
2
3
0
1
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Instruction  
Address  
Dummy  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Phase  
Figure 14  
Dual I/O command  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
IO2  
7
6 5  
4
3
2
1 0 28  
4
5
6
7
0 4  
4
0
1
2
3
4 0  
5 1  
6 2  
7 3  
D2  
4
0
1
2
3
4 0  
5 1  
6 2  
7 3  
D4  
29  
30  
31  
1 5  
2 6  
3 7  
5
6
7
5
6
7
IO3  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address Mode  
Dummy  
D1  
D3  
Figure 15  
Quad I/O command  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
3130  
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Instruction  
Address  
Mode  
Dummy  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Phase  
Figure 16  
DDR fast read with EHPLC = 00b  
Datasheet  
21 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
30 28  
31 29  
0
1
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
7 6 5 4  
7 6 5 4  
3
3
2
2
1 0  
1 0  
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
6
7
Instruction  
Address  
Mode  
Dum  
DLP  
Data 1  
Phase  
Figure 17  
DDR dual I/O read with EHPLC = 01b and DLP  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2824201612 8 4 0 4 0  
2925211713 9 5 1 5 1  
302622181410 6 2 6 2  
312723191511 7 3 7 3  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 4 0 4 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 1 5 1  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 2 6 2  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 3 7 3  
IO2  
IO3  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Mode Dummy  
DLP  
D1 D2  
Figure 18  
DDR quad I/O read  
Additional sequence diagrams, specific to each command, are provided in “Commands” on page 72.  
Datasheet  
22 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
3.3  
Interface states  
This section describes the input and output signal levels as related to the SPI interface behavior.  
Table 4  
Interface states summary  
HOLD# WP# /  
SO / SI /  
I/O1 I/O0  
Interface state  
VCC  
VIO  
RESET# SCK  
CS#  
/
z
I/O3  
I/O2  
Power-Off  
< VCC (low)  
< VCC (cut-off)  
VCC  
VCC  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Z
Z
X
X
Low Power  
Hardware Data  
Protection  
Power-On (cold)  
Reset  
Hardware (warm)  
Reset  
Interface Standby  
Instruction Cycle  
Hold Cycle  
VCC (min)  
VCC (min)  
VCC (min)  
VCC (min)  
VCC (min)  
VCC (min)  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Z
Z
Z
Z
X
Z
X
X
HL  
HH  
HH  
HH  
HH  
X
X
HH  
HL  
HL  
HL  
X
X
X
HT  
HH  
HL  
HH  
HV  
X
HV  
X
HV or  
HT  
HT  
Single Input Cycle  
Host to Memory  
Transfer  
X
HV  
Single Latency  
(Dummy) Cycle  
Single Output Cycle  
Memory to Host  
Transfer  
VCC (min)  
VCC (min)  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
HH  
HH  
HT  
HT  
HL  
HL  
HH  
HH  
X
X
Z
X
X
MV  
Dual Input Cycle  
Host to Memory  
Transfer  
VCC (min)  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
HH  
HT  
HL  
HH  
X
HV  
HV  
Dual Latency  
VCC (min)  
VCC (min)  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
HH  
HH  
HT  
HT  
HL  
HL  
HH  
HH  
X
X
X
X
(Dummy) Cycle  
Dual Output Cycle  
Memory to Host  
Transfer  
MV  
MV  
QPP Address Input  
Cycle  
VCC (min)  
VCC (min)  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
HH  
HH  
HT  
HT  
HL  
HL  
X
X
X
HV  
HV  
Host to Memory  
Transfer  
Quad Input Cycle  
Host to Memory  
Transfer  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
HV  
HV  
HV  
Quad Latency  
VCC (min)  
VCC (min)  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
HH  
HH  
HT  
HT  
HL  
HL  
X
X
X
X
(Dummy) Cycle  
Quad Output Cycle  
Memory to Host  
Transfer  
MV  
MV  
MV  
MV  
Datasheet  
23 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
Table 4  
Interface states summary (continued)  
HOLD# WP# /  
SO / SI /  
I/O1 I/O0  
Interface state  
VCC  
VIO  
RESET# SCK  
CS#  
/
z
I/O3  
I/O2  
DDR Single Input  
Cycle  
Host to Memory  
Transfer  
VCC (min)  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
HH  
HT  
HL  
X
X
X
HV  
DDR Dual Input Cycle  
Host to Memory  
Transfer  
DDR Quad Input  
Cycle  
Host to Memory  
Transfer  
VCC (min)  
VCC (min)  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
HH  
HH  
HT  
HT  
HL  
HL  
X
X
HV  
HV  
HV  
HV  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
HV  
HV  
DDR Latency  
VCC (min)  
VCC (min)  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
HH  
HH  
HT  
HT  
HL MV or Z MV or MVor MVor  
(Dummy) Cycle  
Z
Z
Z
Z
X
DDR Single Output  
Cycle  
Memory to Host  
Transfer  
DDR Dual Output  
Cycle  
Memory to Host  
Transfer  
DDR Quad Output  
Cycle  
Memory to Host  
Transfer  
HL  
HL  
HL  
Z
MV  
VCC (min)  
VCC (min)  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
HH  
HH  
HT  
HT  
Z
Z
MV  
MV  
MV  
MV  
VIO (min)  
VCC  
MV  
MV  
Legend:  
Z = no driver - floating signal  
HL = Host driving VIL  
HH = Host driving VIH  
HV = either HL or HH  
X = HL or HH or Z  
HT = Toggling between HL and HH  
ML = Memory driving VIL  
MH = Memory driving VIH  
MV = either ML or MH  
3.3.1  
Power-off  
When the core supply voltage is at or below the VCC (low) voltage, the device is considered to be powered off. The  
device does not react to external signals, and is prevented from performing any program or erase operation.  
3.3.2  
Low power hardware data protection  
When VCC is less than VCC (cut-off) the memory device will ignore commands to ensure that program and erase  
operations can not start when the core supply voltage is out of the operating range.  
Datasheet  
24 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
3.3.3  
Power-on (cold) reset  
When the core voltage supply remains at or below the VCC (low) voltage for tPD time, then rises to VCC (Minimum)  
the device will begin its Power-On Reset (POR) process. POR continues until the end of tPU. During tPU the device  
does not react to external input signals nor drive any outputs. Following the end of tPU the device transitions to  
the Interface Standby state and can accept commands. For additional information on POR, see “Power-on (cold)  
reset” on page 37.  
3.3.4  
Hardware (warm) reset  
Some of the device package options provide a RESET# input. When RESET# is driven low for tRP time the device  
starts the hardware reset process. The process continues for tRPH time. Following the end of both tRPH and the  
reset hold time following the rise of RESET# (tRH) the device transitions to the Interface Standby state and can  
accept commands. For additional information on hardware reset, see “POR followed by hardware reset” on  
page 38.  
3.3.5  
Interface standby  
When CS# is high the SPI interface is in standby state. Inputs other than RESET# are ignored. The interface waits  
for the beginning of a new command. The next interface state is Instruction Cycle when CS# goes low to begin a  
new command.  
While in interface standby state the memory device draws standby current (ISB) if no embedded algorithm is in  
progress. If an embedded algorithm is in progress, the related current is drawn until the end of the algorithm  
when the entire device returns to standby current draw.  
3.3.6  
Instruction cycle  
When the host drives the MSb of an instruction and CS# goes low, on the next rising edge of SCK the device  
captures the MSb of the instruction that begins the new command. On each following rising edge of SCK the  
device captures the next lower significance bit of the 8 bit instruction. The host keeps RESET# high, CS# low,  
HOLD# high, and drives Write Protect (WP#) signal as needed for the instruction. However, WP# is only relevant  
during instruction cycles of a WRR command and is otherwise ignored.  
Each instruction selects the address space that is operated on and the transfer format used during the remainder  
of the command. The transfer format may be Single, Dual output, Quad output, Dual I/O, Quad I/O, DDR Single  
I/O, DDR Dual I/O, or DDR Quad I/O. The expected next interface state depends on the instruction received.  
Some commands are stand alone, needing no address or data transfer to or from the memory. The host returns  
CS# high after the rising edge of SCK for the eighth bit of the instruction in such commands. The next interface  
state in this case is Interface Standby.  
3.3.7  
Hold  
When Quad mode is not enabled (CR[1]=0) the HOLD# / I/O3 signal is used as the HOLD# input. The host keeps  
RESET# high, HOLD# low, SCK may be at a valid level or continue toggling, and CS# is low. When HOLD# is low a  
command is paused, as though SCK were held low. SI / I/O0 and SO / I/O1 ignore the input level when acting as  
inputs and are high impedance when acting as outputs during hold state. Whether these signals are input or  
output depends on the command and the point in the command sequence when HOLD# is asserted low.  
When HOLD# returns high the next state is the same state the interface was in just before HOLD# was asserted  
low.  
When Quad mode is enabled the HOLD# / I/O3 signal is used as I/O3.  
During DDR commands the HOLD# and WP# inputs are ignored.  
3.3.8  
Single input cycle - Host to memory transfer  
Several commands transfer information after the instruction on the single serial input (SI) signal from host to the  
memory device. The dual output, and quad output commands send address to the memory using only SI but  
return read data using the I/O signals. The host keeps RESET# high, CS# low, HOLD# high, and drives SI as needed  
for the command. The memory does not drive the Serial Output (SO) signal.  
Datasheet  
25 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
The expected next interface state depends on the instruction. Some instructions continue sending address or  
data to the memory using additional Single Input Cycles. Others may transition to Single Latency, or directly to  
Single, Dual, or Quad Output.  
3.3.9  
Single latency (Dummy) cycle  
Read commands may have zero to several latency cycles during which read data is read from the main flash  
memory array before transfer to the host. The number of latency cycles are determined by the Latency Code in  
the configuration register (CR[7:6]). During the latency cycles, the host keeps RESET# high, CS# low, and HOLD#  
high. The Write Protect (WP#) signal is ignored. The host may drive the SI signal during these cycles or the host  
may leave SI floating. The memory does not use any data driven on SI / I/O0 or other I/O signals during the latency  
cycles. In dual or quad read commands, the host must stop driving the I/O signals on the falling edge at the end  
of the last latency cycle. It is recommended that the host stop driving I/O signals during latency cycles so that  
there is sufficient time for the host drivers to turn off before the memory begins to drive at the end of the latency  
cycles. This prevents driver conflict between host and memory when the signal direction changes. The memory  
does not drive the Serial Output (SO) or I/O signals during the latency cycles.  
The next interface state depends on the command structure, that is the number of latency cycles, and whether  
the read is single, dual, or quad width.  
3.3.10  
Single output cycle - Memory to host transfer  
Several commands transfer information back to the host on the single Serial Output (SO) signal. The host keeps  
RESET# high, CS# low, and HOLD# high. The Write Protect (WP#) signal is ignored. The memory ignores the Serial  
Input (SI) signal. The memory drives SO with data.  
The next interface state continues to be Single Output Cycle until the host returns CS# to high ending the  
command.  
3.3.11  
Dual input cycle - Host to memory transfer  
The Read Dual I/O command transfers two address or mode bits to the memory in each cycle. The host keeps  
RESET# high, CS# low, HOLD# high. The Write Protect (WP#) signal is ignored. The host drives address on SI / I/O0  
and SO / I/O1.  
The next interface state following the delivery of address and mode bits is a Dual Latency Cycle if there are latency  
cycles needed or Dual Output Cycle if no latency is required.  
3.3.12  
Dual latency (Dummy) cycle  
Read commands may have zero to several latency cycles during which read data is read from the main flash  
memory array before transfer to the host. The number of latency cycles are determined by the Latency Code in  
the configuration register (CR[7:6]). During the latency cycles, the host keeps RESET# high, CS# low, and HOLD#  
high. The Write Protect (WP#) signal is ignored. The host may drive the SI / I/O0 and SO / I/O1 signals during these  
cycles or the host may leave SI / I/O0 and SO / I/O1 floating. The memory does not use any data driven on SI / I/O0  
and SO / I/O1 during the latency cycles. The host must stop driving SI / I/O0 and SO / I/O1 on the falling edge at  
the end of the last latency cycle. It is recommended that the host stop driving them during all latency cycles so  
that there is sufficient time for the host drivers to turn off before the memory begins to drive at the end of the  
latency cycles. This prevents driver conflict between host and memory when the signal direction changes. The  
memory does not drive the SI / I/O0 and SO / I/O1 signals during the latency cycles.  
The next interface state following the last latency cycle is a Dual Output Cycle.  
3.3.13  
Dual output cycle - Memory to host transfer  
The Read Dual Output and Read Dual I/O return data to the host two bits in each cycle. The host keeps RESET#  
high, CS# low, and HOLD# high. The Write Protect (WP#) signal is ignored. The memory drives data on the SI / I/O0  
and SO / I/O1 signals during the dual output cycles.  
The next interface state continues to be Dual Output Cycle until the host returns CS# to high ending the  
command.  
Datasheet  
26 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
3.3.14  
QPP or QOR address input cycle  
The Quad Page Program and Quad Output Read commands send address to the memory only on I/O0. The other  
I/O signals are ignored because the device must be in Quad mode for these commands thus the Hold and Write  
Protect features are not active. The host keeps RESET# high, CS# low, and drives I/O0.  
For QPP the next interface state following the delivery of address is the Quad Input Cycle.  
For QOR the next interface state following address is a Quad Latency Cycle if there are latency cycles needed or  
Quad Output Cycle if no latency is required.  
3.3.15  
Quad input cycle - Host to memory transfer  
The Quad I/O Read command transfers four address or mode bits to the memory in each cycle. The Quad Page  
Program command transfers four data bits to the memory in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# high, CS# low,  
and drives the I/O signals.  
For Quad I/O Read the next interface state following the delivery of address and mode bits is a Quad Latency Cycle  
if there are latency cycles needed or Quad Output Cycle if no latency is required. For Quad Page Program the host  
returns CS# high following the delivery of data to be programmed and the interface returns to standby state.  
3.3.16  
Quad latency (Dummy) cycle  
Read commands may have zero to several latency cycles during which read data is read from the main flash  
memory array before transfer to the host. The number of latency cycles are determined by the Latency Code in  
the configuration register (CR[7:6]). During the latency cycles, the host keeps RESET# high, CS# low. The host may  
drive the I/O signals during these cycles or the host may leave the I/O floating. The memory does not use any data  
driven on I/O during the latency cycles. The host must stop driving the I/O signals on the falling edge at the end  
of the last latency cycle. It is recommended that the host stop driving them during all latency cycles so that there  
is sufficient time for the host drivers to turn off before the memory begins to drive at the end of the latency cycles.  
This prevents driver conflict between host and memory when the signal direction changes. The memory does not  
drive the I/O signals during the latency cycles.  
The next interface state following the last latency cycle is a Quad Output Cycle.  
3.3.17  
Quad output cycle - Memory to host transfer  
The Quad Output Read and Quad I/O Read return data to the host four bits in each cycle. The host keeps RESET#  
high, and CS# low. The memory drives data on I/O0-I/O3 signals during the Quad output cycles.  
The next interface state continues to be Quad Output Cycle until the host returns CS# to high ending the  
command.  
3.3.18  
DDR single input cycle - Host to memory transfer  
The DDR Fast Read command sends address, and mode bits to the memory only on the I/O0 signal. One bit is  
transferred on the rising edge of SCK and one bit on the falling edge in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# high,  
and CS# low. The other I/O signals are ignored by the memory.  
The next interface state following the delivery of address and mode bits is a DDR Latency Cycle.  
3.3.19  
DDR dual input cycle - Host to memory transfer  
The DDR Dual I/O Read command sends address, and mode bits to the memory only on the I/O0 and I/O1 signals.  
Two bits are transferred on the rising edge of SCK and two bits on the falling edge in each cycle. The host keeps  
RESET# high, and CS# low. The I/O2 and I/O3 signals are ignored by the memory.  
The next interface state following the delivery of address and mode bits is a DDR Latency Cycle.  
Datasheet  
27 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
3.3.20  
DDR quad input cycle - Host to memory transfer  
The DDR Quad I/O Read command sends address, and mode bits to the memory on all the I/O signals. Four bits  
are transferred on the rising edge of SCK and four bits on the falling edge in each cycle. The host keeps RESET#  
high, and CS# low.  
The next interface state following the delivery of address and mode bits is a DDR Latency Cycle.  
3.3.21  
DDR latency cycle  
DDR Read commands may have one to several latency cycles during which read data is read from the main flash  
memory array before transfer to the host. The number of latency cycles are determined by the Latency Code in  
the configuration register (CR[7:6]). During the latency cycles, the host keeps RESET# high and CS# low. The host  
may not drive the I/O signals during these cycles. So that there is sufficient time for the host drivers to turn off  
before the memory begins to drive. This prevents driver conflict between host and memory when the signal  
direction changes. The memory has an option to drive all the I/O signals with a Data Learning Pattern (DLP) during  
the last 4 latency cycles. The DLP option should not be enabled when there are fewer than five latency cycles so  
that there is at least one cycle of high impedance for turn around of the I/O signals before the memory begins  
driving the DLP. When there are more than 4 cycles of latency the memory does not drive the I/O signals until the  
last four cycles of latency.  
The next interface state following the last latency cycle is a DDR Single, Dual, or Quad Output Cycle, depending  
on the instruction.  
3.3.22  
DDR single output cycle - Memory to host transfer  
The DDR Fast Read command returns bits to the host only on the SO / I/O1 signal. One bit is transferred on the  
rising edge of SCK and one bit on the falling edge in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# high, and CS# low. The  
other I/O signals are not driven by the memory.  
The next interface state continues to be DDR Single Output Cycle until the host returns CS# to high ending the  
command.  
3.3.23  
DDR dual output cycle - Memory to host transfer  
The DDR Dual I/O Read command returns bits to the host only on the I/O0 and I/O1 signals. Two bits are trans-  
ferred on the rising edge of SCK and two bits on the falling edge in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# high, and  
CS# low. The I/O2 and I/O3 signals are not driven by the memory.  
The next interface state continues to be DDR Dual Output Cycle until the host returns CS# to high ending the  
command.  
3.3.24  
DDR quad output cycle - Memory to host transfer  
The DDR Quad I/O Read command returns bits to the host on all the I/O signals. Four bits are transferred on the  
rising edge of SCK and four bits on the falling edge in each cycle. The host keeps RESET# high, and CS# low.  
The next interface state continues to be DDR Quad Output Cycle until the host returns CS# to high ending the  
command.  
3.4  
Configuration register effects on the interface  
The configuration register bits 7 and 6 (CR1[7:6]) select the latency code for all read commands. The latency code  
selects the number of mode bit and latency cycles for each type of instruction.  
The configuration register bit 1 (CR1[1]) selects whether Quad mode is enabled to ignore HOLD# and WP# and  
allow Quad Page Program, Quad Output Read, and Quad I/O Read commands. Quad mode must also be selected  
to allow Read DDR Quad I/O commands.  
3.5  
Data protection  
Some basic protection against unintended changes to stored data are provided and controlled purely by the  
hardware design. These are described below. Other software managed protection methods are discussed in the  
software section (page 52) of this document.  
Datasheet  
28 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Signal protocols  
3.5.1  
Power-up  
When the core supply voltage is at or below the VCC (low) voltage, the device is considered to be powered off. The  
device does not react to external signals, and is prevented from performing any program or erase operation.  
Program and erase operations continue to be prevented during the Power-on Reset (POR) because no command  
is accepted until the exit from POR to the Interface Standby state.  
3.5.2  
Low power  
When VCC is less than VCC (cut-off) the memory device will ignore commands to ensure that program and erase  
operations can not start when the core supply voltage is out of the operating range.  
3.5.3  
Clock pulse count  
The device verifies that all program, erase, and Write Registers (WRR) commands consist of a clock pulse count  
that is a multiple of eight before executing them. A command not having a multiple of 8 clock pulse counts is  
ignored and no error status is set for the command.  
Datasheet  
29 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Electrical specifications  
4
Electrical specifications  
4.1  
Table 5  
Absolute maximum ratings  
Absolute maximum ratings  
Storage Temperature Plastic Packages  
Ambient Temperature with Power Applied  
VCC  
–65°C to +150°C  
–65°C to +125°C  
–0.5 V to +4.0 V  
–0.5 V to +4.0 V  
–0.5 V to +(VIO + 0.5 V)  
100 mA  
[6]  
VIO  
[7]  
Input Voltage with Respect to Ground (VSS  
Output Short Circuit Current[8]  
)
4.2  
Table 6  
Thermal resistance  
Thermal resistance  
Description  
Parameter  
Test condition  
SL3016  
FAB024  
FAC024  
Unit  
Theta JA  
Theta JB  
Theta JC  
Thermal resistance Test conditions follow  
(junction to ambient) standard test methods  
29.6  
33.6  
17.6  
11  
33.6  
°C/W  
°C/W  
°C/W  
and procedures for  
Thermal resistance  
7.9  
8.8  
17.6  
8.3  
measuring thermal  
(Junction to board)  
impedance in accor-  
Thermal resistance  
(Junction to case)  
dance with  
EIA/JESD51. with Still  
Air (0 m/s).  
4.3  
Operating ranges  
Operating ranges define those limits between which the functionality of the device is guaranteed.  
4.3.1  
Power supply voltages  
Some package options provide access to a separate input and output buffer power supply called VIO. Packages  
which do not provide the separate VIO connection, internally connect the device VIO to VCC. For these packages,  
the references to VIO are then also references to VCC  
.
VCC  
VIO  
2.7V to 3.6V  
1.65V to VCC +200 mV  
Notes  
6. VIO must always be less than or equal VCC + 200 mV.  
7. See “Input signal overshoot” on page 31 for allowed maximums during signal transition.  
8. No more than one output may be shorted to ground at a time. Duration of the short circuit should not be  
greater than one second.  
9. Stresses above those listed under Table 4 may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating  
only; functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those indicated in the opera-  
tional sections of this data sheet is not implied. Exposure of the device to absolute maximum rating conditions  
for extended periods may affect device reliability.  
Datasheet  
30 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Electrical specifications  
4.3.2  
Temperature ranges  
Table 7  
Temperature ranges  
Spec  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Device  
Unit  
Min  
–40  
–40  
–40  
–40  
–40  
Max  
+85  
+105  
+85  
Industrial (I)  
Industrial Plus (V)  
Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 3 (A)  
Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 2 (B)  
Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 1 (M)  
Ambient Temperature  
TA  
°C  
+105  
+125  
4.3.3  
Input signal overshoot  
During DC conditions, input or I/O signals should remain equal to or between VSS and VIO. During voltage transi-  
tions, inputs or I/Os may overshoot VSS to –2.0V or overshoot to VIO +2.0V, for periods up to 20 ns.  
20 ns  
20 ns  
VIL  
- 2.0V  
20 ns  
Figure 19  
Maximum negative overshoot waveform  
20 ns  
VIO + 2.0V  
VIH  
20 ns  
20 ns  
Figure 20  
Maximum positive overshoot waveform  
Note  
10.Industrial Plus operating and performance parameters will be determined by device characterization and  
may vary from standard industrial temperature range devices as currently shown in this specification.  
Datasheet  
31 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Electrical specifications  
4.4  
Power-up and Power-down  
The device must not be selected at power-up or power-down (that is, CS# must follow the voltage applied on VCC  
until VCC reaches the correct value as follows:  
)
• VCC (min) at power-up, and then for a further delay of tPU  
• VSS at power-down  
A simple pull-up resistor (generally of the order of 100 kΩ) on Chip Select (CS#) can usually be used to insure safe  
and proper power-up and power-down.  
The device ignores all instructions until a time delay of tPU has elapsed after the moment that VCC rises above the  
minimum VCC threshold. See Figure 21. However, correct operation of the device is not guaranteed if VCC returns  
below VCC (min) during tPU. No command should be sent to the device until the end of tPU  
.
After power-up (tPU), the device is in Standby mode (not Deep Power Down mode), draws CMOS standby current  
(ISB), and the WEL bit is reset.  
During power-down or voltage drops below VCC (cut-off), the voltage must drop below VCC (low) for a period of  
tPD for the part to initialize correctly on power-up. See Figure 22. If during a voltage drop the VCC stays above VCC  
(cut-off) the part will stay initialized and will work correctly when VCC is again above VCC (min). In the event  
Power-on Reset (POR) did not complete correctly after power up, the assertion of the RESET# signal will restart  
the POR process.  
Normal precautions must be taken for supply rail decoupling to stabilize the VCC supply at the device. Each device  
in a system should have the VCC rail decoupled by a suitable capacitor close to the package supply connection  
(this capacitor is generally of the order of 0.1 µf).  
Table 8  
Power-up / Power-down voltage and timing  
Parameter  
Symbol  
CC (min)  
CC (cut-off)  
Min  
2.7  
2.4  
1.6  
2.3  
Max  
Unit  
V
VCC (minimum operation voltage)  
VCC (Cut 0ff where re-initialization is needed)  
V
V
V
V
VCC (low)  
VCC (low voltage for initialization to occur)  
VCC (Low voltage for initialization to occur at embedded)  
tPU  
tPD  
VCC (min) to Read operation  
VCC (low) time  
10.0  
300  
µs  
µs  
VCC  
(max)  
VCC  
(min)  
VCC  
tPU  
Full Device Access  
Time  
Figure 21  
Power-up  
Datasheet  
32 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Electrical specifications  
VCC  
(max)  
VCC  
No Device Access Allowed  
(min)  
VCC  
tPU  
Device Access  
Allowed  
(cut-off)  
VCC  
(low)  
VCC  
tPD  
Time  
Figure 22  
Power-down and voltage drop  
Datasheet  
33 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Electrical specifications  
4.5  
DC characteristics  
Applicable within operating ranges.  
Table 9  
Symbol  
DC characteristics  
Parameter  
Input Low Voltage  
Input High Voltage  
Test conditions  
Min  
-0.5  
0.7 x VIO  
Typ[11]  
Max  
Unit  
VIL  
VIH  
VOL  
0.2 x VIO  
VIO+0.4  
0.15 x VIO  
V
V
V
Output Low  
Voltage  
Output High  
Voltage  
Input Leakage  
Current  
Output Leakage  
Current  
IOL = 1.6 mA, VCC = VCC min  
IOH = –0.1 mA  
VOH  
ILI  
0.85 x VIO  
V
VCC = VCC Max, VIN = VIH or VIL  
VCC = VCC Max, VIN = VIH or VIL  
±2  
±2  
µA  
µA  
mA  
ILO  
ICC1  
Active Power  
Supply Current  
(READ)  
Serial SDR@50 MHz  
Serial SDR@133 MHz  
Quad SDR @ 80 MHz  
Quad SDR @104 MHz  
Quad DDR @ 66 MHz  
Quad DDR @80 MHz  
Outputs unconnected during read  
data return[12]  
16  
33/35[13]  
50  
61  
75  
90  
ICC2  
ICC3  
ICC4  
ICC5  
Active Power  
CS# = VIO  
CS# = VIO  
CS# = VIO  
CS# = VIO  
100  
100  
100  
100  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
Supply Current  
(Page Program)  
Active Power  
Supply Current  
(WRR)  
Active Power  
Supply Current  
(SE)  
Active Power  
Supply Current  
(BE)  
I
SB (Industrial) Standby Current RESET#, CS# = VIO; SI, SCK = VIO or  
70  
70  
100  
300  
µA  
µA  
VSS, Industrial Temp  
ISB  
Standby Current RESET#, CS# = VIO; SI, SCK = VIO or  
VSS, Industrial Plus Temp  
(Industrial  
Plus)  
Notes  
11.Typical values are at TAI = 25°C and VCC = VIO = 3V.  
12.Output switching current is not included.  
13.Industrial temperature range / Industrial Plus temperature range.  
Datasheet  
34 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Electrical specifications  
4.5.1  
Active power and standby power modes  
The device is enabled and in the Active Power mode when Chip Select (CS#) is Low. When CS# is high, the device  
is disabled, but may still be in an Active Power mode until all program, erase, and write operations have  
completed. The device then goes into the Standby Power mode, and power consumption drops to ISB  
.
Datasheet  
35 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
5
Timing specifications  
5.1  
Key to switching waveforms  
High Impedance  
Any change permitted  
Valid at logic high or low  
Input  
Symbol  
Output  
Logic High Logic Low  
Logic High Logic Low  
High Impedance  
Valid at logic high or low  
Changing, state unknown  
Figure 23  
Waveform element meanings  
Input Levels  
Output Levels  
0.85 x VIO  
VIO + 0.4V  
0.7 x VIO  
Timing Reference Level  
0.5 x VIO  
0.2 x VIO  
- 0.5V  
0.15 x VIO  
Figure 24  
Input, output, and timing reference levels  
5.2  
AC test conditions  
Device  
Under  
Test  
C
L
Figure 25  
Test setup  
Datasheet  
36 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
Table 10  
Symbol  
AC measurement conditions  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
Load Capacitance  
30  
pF  
15[17]  
Input Rise and Fall  
Times  
2.4  
ns  
CL  
Input Pulse Voltage  
0.2 x VIO to 0.8 VIO  
0.5 VIO  
V
V
Input Timing Ref  
Voltage  
Output Timing Ref  
Voltage  
0.5 VIO  
V
5.2.1  
Table 11  
Capacitance characteristics  
Capacitance  
Parameter  
Test conditions  
1 MHz, TA = 25°C  
1 MHz, TA = 25°C  
Min Max Unit  
CIN  
COUT  
Input Capacitance (applies to SCK, CS#, RESET#)  
Output Capacitance (applies to All I/O)  
8
8
pF  
pF  
5.3  
5.3.1  
Reset  
Power-on (cold) reset  
The device executes a Power-On Reset (POR) process until a time delay of tPU has elapsed after the moment that  
VCC rises above the minimum VCC threshold. See Figure 21, Table 7, and Table 11. The device must not be  
selected (CS# to go high with VIO) during power-up (tPU), i.e. no commands may be sent to the device until the  
end of tPU. RESET# is ignored during POR. If RESET# is low during POR and remains low through and beyond the  
end of tPU, CS# must remain high until tRH after RESET# returns high. RESET# must return high for greater than  
tRS before returning low to initiate a hardware reset.  
VCC  
VIO  
tPU  
If RESET# is low at tPU end  
CS# must be high at tPU end  
RESET#  
tRH  
CS#  
Figure 26  
Notes  
Reset low at the end of POR  
14.Output High-Z is defined as the point where data is no longer driven.  
15.Input slew rate: 1.5 V/ns.  
16.AC characteristics tables assume clock and data signals have the same slew rate (slope).  
17.DDR Operation.  
18.For more information on capacitance, please consult the IBIS models.  
Datasheet  
37 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
VCC  
VIO  
tPU  
RESET#  
If RESET# is high at tPU end  
tPU  
CS# may stay high or go low at tPU end  
CS#  
Figure 27  
Reset high at the end of POR  
VCC  
VIO  
tPU  
tPU  
tRS  
RESET#  
CS#  
Figure 28  
POR followed by hardware reset  
5.3.2  
Hardware (warm) reset  
When the RESET# input transitions from VIH to VIL the device will reset register states in the same manner as  
power-on reset but, does not go through the full reset process that is performed during POR. The hardware reset  
process requires a period of tRPH to complete. If the POR process did not complete correctly for any reason during  
power-up (tPU), RESET# going low will initiate the full POR process instead of the hardware reset process and will  
require tPU to complete the POR process.  
The RESET# input provides a hardware method of resetting the flash memory device to standby state.  
• RESET# must be high for tRS following tPU or tRPH, before going low again to initiate a hardware reset.  
• When RESET# is driven low for at least a minimum period of time (tRP), the device terminates any operation in  
progress, tri-states all outputs, and ignores all read/write commands for the duration of tRPH. The device resets  
the interface to standby state.  
• If CS# is low at the time RESET# is asserted, CS# must return high during tRPH before it can be asserted low again  
after tRH  
.
• Hardware Reset is only offered in 16-lead SOIC and BGA packages.  
tRP  
Any prior reset  
tRPH  
RESET#  
CS#  
tRH  
tRH  
tRS  
tRPH  
Figure 29  
Hardware reset  
Datasheet  
38 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
Table 12  
Parameter  
Hardware reset parameters  
Description  
Limit  
Time  
Unit  
tRS  
Reset Setup - Prior Reset end and RESET# high before RESET#  
low  
Min  
50  
ns  
tRPH  
tRP  
tRH  
Reset Pulse Hold - RESET# low to CS# low  
RESET# Pulse Width  
Reset Hold - RESET# high before CS# low  
Min  
Min  
Min  
35  
200  
50  
µs  
ns  
ns  
Notes  
19.RESET# Low is optional and ignored during Power-up (tPU). If Reset# is asserted during the end of tPU, the  
device will remain in the reset state and tRH will determine when CS# may go Low.  
20.Sum of tRP and tRH must be equal to or greater than tRPH  
.
Datasheet  
39 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
5.4  
SDR AC characteristics  
Table 13  
Symbol  
FSCK, R  
AC characteristics (Single die package, VIO = VCC 2.7V to 3.6V)  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
50  
Unit  
MHz  
SCK Clock Frequency for READ and 4READ instruc-  
tions  
DC  
FSCK, C  
FSCK, C  
SCK Clock Frequency for single commands as  
DC  
DC  
133  
104  
MHz  
MHz  
shown in Table 40[24]  
SCK Clock Frequency for the following dual and  
quad commands: DOR, 4DOR, QOR, 4QOR, DIOR,  
4DIOR, QIOR, 4QIOR  
FSCK, QPP SCK Clock Frequency for the QPP, 4QPP commands  
PSCK SCK Clock Period  
WH, tCH Clock High Time[25]  
WL, tCL Clock Low Time[25]  
DC  
1/ FSCK  
45% PSCK  
45% PSCK  
0.1  
80  
MHz  
t
t
ns  
ns  
V/ns  
V/ns  
ns  
t
t
CRT, tCLCH Clock Rise Time (slew rate)  
CFT, tCHCL Clock Fall Time (slew rate)  
0.1  
10  
50  
tCS  
CS# High Time (Read Instructions)  
CS# High Time (Program/Erase)  
tCSS  
tCSH  
tSU  
tHD  
tV  
CS# Active Setup Time (relative to SCK)  
CS# Active Hold Time (relative to SCK)  
Data in Setup Time  
Data in Hold Time  
Clock Low to Output Valid  
3
3
1.5  
2
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
3000[26]  
8.0[22]  
7.65[23]  
6.5[24]  
tHO  
tDIS  
Output Hold Time  
Output Disable Time  
WP# Setup Time  
WP# Hold Time  
HOLD# Active Setup Time (relative to SCK)  
HOLD# Active Hold Time (relative to SCK)  
HOLD# Non Active Setup Time (relative to SCK)  
HOLD# Non Active Hold Time (relative to SCK)  
HOLD# enable to Output Invalid  
HOLD# disable to Output Valid  
2
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
8
8
8
tWPS  
tWPH  
tHLCH  
tCHHH  
tHHCH  
tCHHL  
tHZ  
20[21]  
100[21]  
3
3
3
3
tLZ  
Notes  
21.Only applicable as a constraint for WRR instruction when SRWD is set to a 1.  
22.Full VCC range (2.7 - 3.6V) and CL = 30 pF.  
23.Regulated VCC range (3.0 - 3.6V) and CL = 30 pF.  
24.Regulated VCC range (3.0 - 3.6V) and CL = 15 pF.  
25.±10% duty cycle is supported for frequencies 50 MHz.  
26.Maximum value only applies during Program/Erase Suspend/Resume commands.  
Datasheet  
40 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
Table 14  
Symbol  
FSCK, R  
FSCK, C  
PSCK  
AC characteristics (Single die package, VIO 1.65V to 2.7V, VCC 2.7V to 3.6V)  
Parameter  
SCK Clock Frequency for READ, 4READ instructions  
SCK Clock Frequency for all others[29]  
SCK Clock Period  
Min  
DC  
DC  
Typ  
Max  
50  
66  
Unit  
MHz  
MHz  
1/ FSCK  
45% PSCK  
45% PSCK  
0.1  
t
t
WH, tCH Clock High Time[30]  
WL, tCL Clock Low Time[30]  
tCRT, tCLCH Clock Rise Time (slew rate)  
CFT, tCHCL Clock Fall Time (slew rate)  
ns  
ns  
V/ns  
V/ns  
ns  
t
0.1  
tCS  
CS# High Time (Read Instructions)  
CS# High Time (Program/Erase)  
10  
50  
tCSS  
tCSH  
tSU  
tHD  
tV  
CS# Active Setup Time (relative to SCK)  
CS# Active Hold Time (relative to SCK)  
Data in Setup Time  
Data in Hold Time  
Clock Low to Output Valid  
10  
3
5
4
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
3000[31]  
14.5[28]  
12.0[29]  
tHO  
tDIS  
Output Hold Time  
Output Disable Time  
WP# Setup Time  
WP# Hold Time  
HOLD# Active Setup Time (relative to SCK)  
HOLD# Active Hold Time (relative to SCK)  
HOLD# Non Active Setup Time (relative to SCK)  
HOLD# Non Active Hold Time (relative to SCK)  
HOLD# enable to Output Invalid  
HOLD# disable to Output Valid  
2
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
14  
14  
14  
tWPS  
tWPH  
tHLCH  
tCHHH  
tHHCH  
tCHHL  
tHZ  
20[27]  
100[27]  
5
5
5
5
tLZ  
5.4.1  
Clock timing  
PSCK  
tCH  
tCL  
VIH min  
Figure 30  
Clock timing  
Notes  
27.Only applicable as a constraint for WRR instruction when SRWD is set to a 1.  
28.CL = 30 pF.  
29.CL = 15 pF.  
30.±10% duty cycle is supported for frequencies 50 MHz  
31.Maximum value only applies during Program/Erase Suspend/Resume commands.  
Datasheet  
41 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
5.4.2  
Input / Output timing  
tCS  
CS#  
SCK  
tCSH  
tCSH  
tCSS  
tCSS  
tSU  
tHD  
SI  
MSB IN  
LSB IN  
SO  
Figure 31  
SPI single bit input timing  
tCS  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
tLZ  
tHO  
tV  
LSB OUT  
tDIS  
SO  
MSB OUT  
Figure 32  
SPI single bit output timing  
tCS  
CS#  
tCSS  
tCSH  
tCSS  
SCK  
tSU  
tHD  
tLZ  
tHO  
tV  
tDIS  
MSB IN  
LSB IN  
MSB OUT.  
LSB OUT  
IO  
Figure 33  
SPI SDR MIO timing  
Datasheet  
42 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
CS#  
SCK  
tCHHH  
tHHCH  
tHLCH  
tHLCH  
tCHHL  
tCHHH  
tCHHL  
HOLD#  
Hold Condition  
Standard Use  
Hold Condition  
Non-standard Use  
SI_or_IO_(during_input)  
tHZ  
tLZ  
tHZ  
tLZ  
SO_or_IO_(during_output)  
A
B
B
C
D
E
Figure 34  
Hold timing  
CS#  
tWPS  
WP#  
SCK  
tWPH  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
WRR Instruction  
Input Data  
Figure 35  
WP# input timing  
Datasheet  
43 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
5.5  
DDR AC characteristics  
Table 15  
AC characteristics DDR operation  
66 MHz  
Typ  
80 MHz  
Typ  
Sym-  
bol  
Parameter  
Min  
Unit  
Max  
66  
Min  
DC  
Max  
80  
FSCK, R SCK Clock Frequency for DDR  
READ instruction  
DC  
MHz  
PSCK, R SCK Clock Period for DDR READ  
instruction  
15  
12.5  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tWH  
,
Clock High Time  
45%  
PSCK  
45%  
PSCK  
45% PSCK  
45% PSCK  
tCH  
t
WL, tCL Clock Low Time  
tCS  
CS# High Time (Read Instructions)  
10  
3
10  
3
ns  
ns  
tCSS CS# Active Setup Time (relative to  
SCK)  
tCSH CS# Active Hold Time (relative to  
SCK)  
tSU I/O in Setup Time  
3
2
3
ns  
ns  
1.5  
3000[33]  
3000[33  
]
tHD I/O in Hold Time  
2
1.5  
1.5  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ps  
tV  
Clock Low to Output Valid  
6.5[32]  
6.5[32]  
tHO Output Hold Time  
tDIS Output Disable Time  
1.5  
8
8
600  
8
8
600  
tLZ  
Clock to Output Low Impedance  
0
0
tIO_SKE First Output to last Output data  
valid time  
W
5.5.1  
DDR input timing  
tCSH  
tCSH  
tCSS  
tCSS  
SCK  
tHD  
tSU  
tHD  
tSU  
SI_or_IO  
SO  
MSB IN  
LSB IN  
Figure 36  
Notes  
SPI DDR input timing  
32.Regulated VCC range (3.0 - 3.6V) and CL =15 pF.  
33.Maximum value only applies during Program/Erase Suspend/Resume commands.  
Datasheet  
44 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Timing specifications  
5.5.2  
DDR output timing  
tCS  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
tLZ  
tHO  
tV  
tV  
tDIS  
SO_or_IO  
MSB  
LSB  
Figure 37  
SPI DDR output timing  
5.5.3  
DDR data valid timing using DLP  
pSCK  
tCL  
tCH  
SCK  
tIO  
tV  
SKEW  
Figure 38  
SPI DDR data valid window  
The minimum data valid window (tDV) and tV minimum can be calculated as follows:  
[35]  
t
DV = Minimum half clock cycle time (tCLH)  
[34]- tOTT[36] - tIO_SKEW  
tV _min = tHO + tIO_SKEW + tOTT  
Example:  
80 MHz clock frequency = 12.5 ns clock period, DDR operations and duty cycle of 45% or higher  
CLH = 0.45 x PSCK = 0.45 x 12.5 ns = 5.625 ns  
t
Bus impedance of 45 ohm and capacitance of 22 pf, with timing reference of 0.75VCC, the rise time from 0 to 1 or  
fall time 1 to 0 is 1.4[39] x RC time constant (Tau)[38] = 1.4 x 0.99 ns = 1.39 ns  
t
OTT = rise time or fall time = 1.39 ns.  
Data Valid Window  
tDV = tCLH - tIO_SKEW - tOTT = 5.625 ns - 600 ps - 1.39 ns = 3.635 ns  
tV Minimum  
tV _min = tHO + tIO_SKEW + tOTT = 1.0 ns + 600 ps + 1.39 ns = 2.99 ns  
Notes  
34.tCLH is the shorter duration of tCL or tCH  
.
35.tIO_SKEW is the maximum difference (delta) between the minimum and maximum tV (output valid) across all  
IO signals.  
36.tOTT is the maximum Output Transition Time from one valid data value to the next valid data value on each  
IO. tOTT is dependent on system level considerations including:  
a. Memory device output impedance (drive strength).  
b. System level parasitics on the IOs (primarily bus capacitance).  
c. Host memory controller input VIH and VIL levels at which 0 to 1 and 1 to 0 transitions are recognized.  
3d7..ttDOTVT iissntohtea sdpaectiaficvaatiolindtewstienddbyoIwnf.ineon, it is system dependent and must be derived by the system designer based on the above considerations.  
38.Tau = R (Output Impedance) x C (Load capacitance).  
39.Multiplier of Tau time for voltage to rise to 75% of VCC  
.
Datasheet  
45 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Physical interface  
6
Physical interface  
Table 16  
Model specific connections  
VIO / RFU  
Versatile I/O or RFU — Some device models bond this connector to the device I/O power  
supply, other models bond the device I/O supply to Vcc within the package leaving this  
package connector unconnected.  
RESET# / RFU  
RESET# or RFU — Some device models bond this connector to the device RESET#  
signal, other models bond the RESET# signal to Vcc within the package leaving this  
package connector unconnected.  
6.1  
SOIC 16-lead package  
SOIC 16 connection diagram  
6.1.1  
16  
15  
14  
SCK  
1
2
3
HOLD#/IO3  
VCC  
SI/IO0  
VIO/RFU  
RESET#/RFU  
DNU  
13  
12  
4
5
NC  
DNU  
DNU  
RFU  
6
11  
DNU  
VSS  
CS#  
7
8
10  
9
SO/IO1  
WP#/IO2  
Figure 39  
16-lead SOIC package, top view  
Note  
40.Refer to Table 2 for signal descriptions.  
Datasheet  
46 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Physical interface  
6.1.2  
SOIC 16 physical diagram  
A-B  
C
0.20  
0.10  
C
D
2X  
0.33  
C
0.25  
0.10  
M
C A-B D  
C
0.10  
C
DIMENSIONS  
NOTES:  
SYMBOL  
MIN.  
NOM.  
MAX.  
2.65  
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.  
2. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5M - 1994.  
A
A1  
A2  
b
2.35  
0.10  
2.05  
-
3. DIMENSION D DOES NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH, PROTRUSIONS OR GATE BURRS.  
MOLD FLASH, PROTRUSIONS OR GATE BURRS SHALL NOT EXCEED 0.15 mm PER  
END. DIMENSION E1 DOES NOT INCLUDE INTERLEAD FLASH OR PROTRUSION.  
INTERLEAD FLASH OR PROTRUSION SHALL NOT EXCEED 0.25 mm PER SIDE.  
D AND E1 DIMENSIONS ARE DETERMINED AT DATUM H.  
4. THE PACKAGE TOP MAY BE SMALLER THAN THE PACKAGE BOTTOM. DIMENSIONS  
D AND E1 ARE DETERMINED AT THE OUTMOST EXTREMES OF THE PLASTIC BODY  
EXCLUSIVE OF MOLD FLASH, TIE BAR BURRS, GATE BURRS AND INTERLEAD  
FLASH, BUT INCLUSIVE OF ANY MISMATCH BETWEEN THE TOP AND BOTTOM OF  
THE PLASTIC BODY.  
-
0.30  
2.55  
0.51  
0.48  
-
0.31  
0.27  
0.20  
0.20  
-
b1  
c
-
0.33  
0.30  
-
-
c1  
5. DATUMS A AND B TO BE DETERMINED AT DATUM H.  
6. "N" IS THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF TERMINAL POSITIONS FOR THE SPECIFIED  
PACKAGE LENGTH.  
7. THE DIMENSIONS APPLY TO THE FLAT SECTION OF THE LEAD BETWEEN 0.10 TO  
0.25 mm FROM THE LEAD TIP.  
8. DIMENSION "b" DOES NOT INCLUDE DAMBAR PROTRUSION. ALLOWABLE DAMBAR  
PROTRUSION SHALL BE 0.10 mm TOTAL IN EXCESS OF THE "b" DIMENSION AT  
MAXIMUM MATERIAL CONDITION. THE DAMBAR CANNOT BE LOCATED ON THE  
LOWER RADIUS OF THE LEAD FOOT.  
D
E
10.30 BSC  
10.30 BSC  
7.50 BSC  
E1  
e
1.27 BSC  
-
L
1.27  
0.40  
L1  
L2  
N
9. THIS CHAMFER FEATURE IS OPTIONAL. IF IT IS NOT PRESENT, THEN A PIN 1  
IDENTIFIER MUST BE LOCATED WITHIN THE INDEX AREA INDICATED.  
10. LEAD COPLANARITY SHALL BE WITHIN 0.10 mm AS MEASURED FROM THE  
SEATING PLANE.  
1.40 REF  
0.25 BSC  
16  
h
0.25  
0°  
-
-
-
-
0.75  
8°  
0
0 1  
0 2  
5°  
15°  
-
0°  
Figure 40  
SOIC 16-lead, 300-mil body width (SO3016)  
Datasheet  
47 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Physical interface  
6.2  
FAB024 24-ball BGA package  
6.2.1  
Connection diagram  
1
2
3
4
5
A
B
C
D
E
NC  
NC  
VSS  
RESET#/  
RFU  
NC  
NC  
NC  
DNU  
DNU  
DNU  
NC  
SCK  
CS#  
VCC  
RFU WP#/IO2  
SO/IO1 SI/IO0 HOLD#/IO3 NC  
NC  
NC  
VIO/RFU  
NC  
Figure 41  
24-ball BGA, 5 x 5 ball footprint (FAB024), top view[41]  
Note  
41.Signal connections are in the same relative positions as FAC024 BGA, allowing a single PCB footprint to use  
either package.  
Datasheet  
48 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Physical interface  
6.2.2  
FAB024 physical diagram  
NOTES:  
DIMENSIONS  
NOM.  
SYMBOL  
MIN.  
MAX.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING METHODS PER ASME Y14.5M-1994.  
A
-
-
-
1.20  
-
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.  
A1  
D
0.20  
BALL POSITION DESIGNATION PER JEP95, SECTION 3, SPP-020.  
8.00 BSC  
4.  
5.  
e REPRESENTS THE SOLDER BALL GRID PITCH.  
E
6.00 BSC  
4.00 BSC  
4.00 BSC  
5
D1  
E1  
MD  
ME  
N
SYMBOL "MD" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "D" DIRECTION.  
SYMBOL "ME" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "E" DIRECTION.  
N IS THE NUMBER OF POPULATED SOLDER BALL POSITIONS FOR MATRIX SIZE MD X ME.  
5
6
7
DIMENSION "b" IS MEASURED AT THE MAXIMUM BALL DIAMETER IN A PLANE  
PARALLEL TO DATUM C.  
24  
0.40  
b
0.35  
0.45  
"SD" AND "SE" ARE MEASURED WITH RESPECT TO DATUMS A AND B AND DEFINE THE  
POSITION OF THE CENTER SOLDER BALL IN THE OUTER ROW.  
eE  
eD  
SD  
SE  
1.00 BSC  
1.00 BSC  
0.00 BSC  
0.00 BSC  
WHEN THERE IS AN ODD NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE OUTER ROW, "SD" OR "SE" = 0.  
WHEN THERE IS AN EVEN NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE OUTER ROW, "SD" = eD/2 AND  
"SE" = eE/2.  
8.  
9.  
"+" INDICATES THE THEORETICAL CENTER OF DEPOPULATED BALLS.  
A1 CORNER TO BE IDENTIFIED BY CHAMFER, LASER OR INK MARK,  
METALLIZED MARK INDENTATION OR OTHER MEANS.  
Figure 42  
Ball grid array 24-ball 6x8 mm (FAB024)  
Datasheet  
49 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Physical interface  
6.3  
FAC024 24-ball BGA package  
Connection diagram  
6.3.1  
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
NC  
NC  
NC  
VSS  
RESET#/  
RFU  
DNU  
DNU  
DNU  
SCK  
CS#  
VCC  
RFU WP#/IO2  
SO/IO1 SI/IO0 HOLD#/IO3  
E
F
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
VIO/RFU  
NC  
Figure 43  
24-ball BGA, 4 x 6 ball footprint (FAC024), top view[42]  
Note  
42.Signal connections are in the same relative positions as FAC024 BGA, allowing a single PCB footprint to use  
either package.  
Datasheet  
50 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Physical interface  
6.3.2  
FAC024 physical diagram  
NOTES:  
DIMENSIONS  
NOM.  
SYMBOL  
MIN.  
-
MAX.  
1.20  
-
1.  
2.  
3.  
DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING METHODS PER ASME Y14.5M-1994.  
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.  
A
A1  
D
-
-
0.25  
BALL POSITION DESIGNATION PER JEP95, SECTION 3, SPP-020.  
8.00 BSC  
4.  
5.  
e
REPRESENTS THE SOLDER BALL GRID PITCH.  
E
6.00 BSC  
5.00 BSC  
3.00 BSC  
6
SYMBOL "MD" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "D" DIRECTION.  
D1  
E1  
MD  
ME  
N
SYMBOL "ME" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "E" DIRECTION.  
N IS THE NUMBER OF POPULATED SOLDER BALL POSITIONS FOR MATRIX SIZE MD X ME.  
4
6
7
DIMENSION "b" IS MEASURED AT THE MAXIMUM BALL DIAMETER IN A PLANE  
PARALLEL TO DATUM C.  
24  
0.40  
b
0.35  
0.45  
"SD" AND "SE" ARE MEASURED WITH RESPECT TO DATUMS A AND B AND DEFINE THE  
POSITION OF THE CENTER SOLDER BALL IN THE OUTER ROW.  
eE  
eD  
SD  
SE  
1.00 BSC  
1.00 BSC  
0.50 BSC  
0.50 BSC  
WHEN THERE IS AN ODD NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE OUTER ROW, "SD" OR "SE" = 0.  
WHEN THERE IS AN EVEN NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE OUTER ROW, "SD" = eD/2 AND  
"SE" = eE/2.  
"+" INDICATES THE THEORETICAL CENTER OF DEPOPULATED BALLS.  
8.  
9.  
A1 CORNER TO BE IDENTIFIED BY CHAMFER, LASER OR INK MARK,  
METALLIZED MARK INDENTATION OR OTHER MEANS.  
Figure 44  
Ball grid array 24-ball 6x8 mm (FAC024)  
6.3.3  
Special handling instructions for FBGA packages  
Flash memory devices in BGA packages may be damaged if exposed to ultrasonic cleaning methods. The package  
and/or data integrity may be compromised if the package body is exposed to temperatures above 150°C for  
prolonged periods of time.  
Datasheet  
51 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface  
Software interface  
This section discusses the features and behaviors most relevant to host system software that interacts with the  
S25FL512S memory device.  
Datasheet  
52 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
7
Address space maps  
7.1  
Overview  
7.1.1  
Extended address  
The S25FL512S device supports 32-bit addresses to enable higher density devices than allowed by previous  
generation (legacy) SPI devices that supported only 24-bit addresses. A 24-bit byte resolution address can access  
only 16 MB (128 Mb) of maximum density. A 32-bit byte resolution address allows direct addressing of up to a 4  
Gbytes (32 Gbits) of address space.  
Legacy commands continue to support 24-bit addresses for backward software compatibility. Extended 32-bit  
addresses are enabled in three ways:  
• Bank address register — a software (command) loadable internal register that supplies the high order bits of  
address when legacy 24-bit addresses are in use.  
• Extended address mode — a bank address register bit that changes all legacy commands to expect 32 bits of  
address supplied from the host system.  
• New commands — that perform both legacy and new functions, which expect 32-bit address.  
The default condition at power-up and after reset, is the Bank address register loaded with zeros and the  
extended address mode set for 24-bit addresses. This enables legacy software compatible access to the first 128  
Mb of a device.  
7.1.2  
Multiple address spaces  
Many commands operate on the main flash memory array. Some commands operate on address spaces separate  
from the main flash array. Each separate address space uses the full 32-bit address but may only define a small  
portion of the available address space.  
7.2  
Flash memory array  
The main flash array is divided into erase units called sectors. The sectors are organized as uniform 256-KB  
sectors.  
Table 17  
S25FL512S sector and memory address map, uniform 256-KB sectors  
Address range  
Sector size (KB)  
Sector count  
Sector range  
Notes  
(8-bit)  
SA00  
00000000h-0003FFF  
Fh  
Sector Starting  
Address  
256  
256  
:
:
Sector Ending  
Address  
SA255  
03FC0000h-03FFFFF  
Fh  
Note This is a condensed table that uses a sector as a reference. There are address ranges that are not explicitly  
listed. All 256-kB sectors have the pattern XXXX0000h-XXXXFFFFh.  
7.3  
ID-CFI address space  
The RDIDJ command (9Fh) reads information from a separate flash memory address space for device identifi-  
cation (ID) and Common Flash Interface (CFI) information. See “Device ID and common flash interface (ID-CFI)  
address map” on page 128 for the tables defining the contents of the ID-CFI address space. The ID-CFI address  
space is programmed by Infineon and read-only for the host system.  
Datasheet  
53 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
7.4  
JEDEC JESD216 serial flash discoverable parameters (SFDP) space.  
The RSFDP command (5Ah) reads information from a separate Flash memory address space for device identifi-  
cation, feature, and configuration information, in accord with the JEDEC JESD216B standard for Serial Flash  
Discoverable Parameters. The ID-CFI address space is incorporated as one of the SFDP parameters.  
See “Serial flash discoverable parameters (SFDP) address map” on page 124 for the table defining the  
contents of the SFDP address space. The SFDP address space is programmed by Infineon and is read-only for the  
host system  
7.5  
OTP address space  
Each S25FL512S memory device has a 1024-byte One Time Program (OTP) address space that is separate from  
the main flash array. The OTP area is divided into 32, individually lockable, 32-byte aligned and length regions.  
In the 32-byte region starting at address zero:  
• The 16 lowest address bytes are programmed by Infineon with a 128-bit random number. Only Infineon is able  
to program these bytes.  
• The next 4 higher address bytes (OTP Lock Bytes) are used to provide one bit per OTP region to permanently  
protect each region from programming. The bytes are erased when shipped from Infineon. After an OTP region  
is programmed, it can be locked to prevent further programming, by programming the related protection bit  
in the OTP Lock Bytes.  
• The next higher 12 bytes of the lowest address region are Reserved for Future Use (RFU). The bits in these RFU  
bytes may be programmed by the host system but it must be understood that a future device may use those  
bits for protection of a larger OTP space. The bytes are erased when shipped from Infineon.  
The remaining regions are erased when shipped from Infineon, and are available for programming of additional  
permanent data.  
Refer to Figure 45 for a pictorial representation of the OTP memory space.  
The OTP memory space is intended for increased system security. OTP values, such as the random number  
programmed by Infineon, can be used to “mate” a flash component with the system CPU/ASIC to prevent device  
substitution.  
The configuration register FREEZE (CR1[0]) bit protects the entire OTP memory space from programming when  
set to 1. This allows trusted boot code to control programming of OTP regions then set the FREEZE bit to prevent  
further OTP memory space programming during the remainder of normal power-on system operation.  
32 Byte OTP Region 31  
32 Byte OTP Region 30  
32 Byte OTP Region 29  
.
When programmed to  
“0” each lock bit  
protects its related 32  
byte region from any  
further programming  
.
.
32 Byte OTP Region 3  
32 Byte OTP Region 2  
32 Byte OTP Region 1  
32 Byte OTP Region 0  
...  
Lock Bits 31 to 0  
Reserved  
Lock Bytes  
16 Byte Random Number  
Contents of Region 0  
{
Byte 1F  
Byte 10  
Byte 0  
Figure 45  
OTP address space  
Datasheet  
54 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
Table 18  
OTP address map  
Initial delivery state  
(Hex)  
Region  
Byte address range (Hex)  
Contents  
Region 0  
000  
Least Significant Byte  
(LSB) of Spansion  
Programmed Random  
Number  
Spansion Programmed  
Random Number  
...  
...  
00F  
Most Significant Byte  
(MSB) of Spansion  
Programmed Random  
Number  
010 to 013  
Region Locking Bits  
Byte 10 [bit 0] locks region  
0 from programming  
when = 0  
All bytes = FF  
...  
Byte 13 [bit 7] locks region  
31 from programming  
when = 0  
014 to 01F  
020 to 03F  
040 to 05F  
...  
Reserved for Future Use  
(RFU)  
All bytes = FF  
All bytes = FF  
All bytes = FF  
All bytes = FF  
All bytes = FF  
Region 1  
Region 2  
...  
Available for User  
Programming  
Available for User  
Programming  
Available for User  
Programming  
Available for User  
Programming  
Region 31  
3E0 to 3FF  
7.6  
Registers  
Registers are small groups of memory cells used to configure how the S25FL512-S memory device operates or to  
report the status of device operations. The registers are accessed by specific commands. The commands (and  
hexadecimal instruction codes) used for each register are noted in each register description. The individual  
register bits may be volatile, non-volatile, or One Time Programmable (OTP). The type for each bit is noted in each  
register description. The default state shown for each bit refers to the state after power-on reset, hardware reset,  
or software reset if the bit is volatile. If the bit is non-volatile or OTP, the default state is the value of the bit when  
the device is shipped from Infineon. Non-volatile bits have the same cycling (erase and program) endurance as  
the main flash array.  
Table 19  
Register descriptions  
Register  
Abbreviation  
SR1[7:0]  
Type  
Volatile  
Volatile  
RFU  
Bit location  
Status Register 1  
Configuration Register 1  
Status Register 2  
AutoBoot Register  
Bank Address Register  
ECC Status Register  
7:0  
7:0  
7:0  
31:0  
7:0  
7:0  
CR1[7:0]  
SR2[7:0]  
ABRD[31:0]  
BRAC[7:0]  
ECCSR[7:0]  
Non-volatile  
Volatile  
Volatile  
Datasheet  
55 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
Table 19  
Register descriptions  
Register  
Abbreviation  
ASPR[15:1]  
ASPR[0]  
Type  
OTP  
RFU  
Bit location  
ASP Register  
ASP Register  
15:1  
0
Password Register  
PPB Lock Register  
PPB Lock Register  
PASS[63:0]  
PPBL[7:1]  
PPBL[0]  
Non-volatile OTP  
Volatile  
63:0  
7:1  
0
Volatile  
Read Only  
PPB Access Register  
DYB Access Register  
SPI DDR Data Learning Registers  
SPI DDR Data Learning Registers  
PPBAR[7:0]  
DYBAR[7:0]  
NVDLR[7:0]  
VDLR[7:0]  
Non-volatile  
Volatile  
Non-volatile  
Volatile  
7:0  
7:0  
7:0  
7:0  
7.6.1  
Status register 1 (SR1)  
Related Commands: Read Status Register (RDSR1 05h), Write Registers (WRR 01h), Write Enable (WREN 06h),  
Write Disable (WRDI 04h), Clear Status Register (CLSR 30h).  
Table 20  
Status register-1 (SR1)  
Field  
Default  
state  
Bits  
Function  
Type  
Description  
name  
7
SRWD  
Status  
Register  
Write  
Non-volatile  
0
1 = Locks state of SRWD, BP, and configuration  
register bits when WP# is low by ignoring WRR  
command  
Disable  
0 = No protection, even when WP# is low  
6
5
P_ERR Programmi  
ng Error  
Volatile, Read  
only  
0
1 = Error occurred.  
0 = No Error  
Occurred  
E_ERR Erase Error  
Occurred  
Volatile, Read  
only  
0
1 = Error occurred  
0 = No Error  
4
3
2
BP2  
BP1  
BP0  
Block  
Protection  
Volatile if  
CR1[3]=1,  
Non-volatile if  
CR1[3]=0  
1 if  
Protects selected range of sectors (Block)  
CR1[3]=1, from Program or Erase  
0 when  
shipped  
from  
Infineon  
1
WEL WriteEnable  
Latch  
Volatile  
0
0
1 = Device accepts Write Registers (WRR),  
program or erase commands  
0 = Device ignores Write Registers (WRR),  
program or erase commands  
This bit is not affected by WRR, only WREN and  
WRDI commands affect this bit  
1 = Device Busy, a Write Registers (WRR),  
program, erase or other operation is in  
progress  
0 = Ready Device is in standby mode and can  
accept commands  
0
WIP  
Write in  
Progress  
Volatile, Read  
only  
The Status Register contains both status and control bits:  
Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) SR1[7]: Places the device in the Hardware Protected mode when this bit  
is set to 1 and the WP# input is driven low. In this mode, the SRWD, BP2, BP1, and BP0 bits of the Status Register  
Datasheet  
56 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
become read-only bits and the Write Registers (WRR) command is no longer accepted for execution. If WP# is high  
the SRWD bit and BP bits may be changed by the WRR command. If SRWD is 0, WP# has no effect and the SRWD  
bit and BP bits may be changed by the WRR command. The SRWD bit has the same non-volatile endurance as the  
main flash array.  
Program Error (P_ERR) SR1[6]: The Program Error Bit is used as a program operation success or failure  
indication. When the Program Error bit is set to a 1 it indicates that there was an error in the last program  
operation. This bit will also be set when the user attempts to program within a protected main memory sector or  
locked OTP region. When the Program Error bit is set to a 1 this bit can be reset to 0 with the Clear Status Register  
(CLSR) command. This is a read-only bit and is not affected by the WRR command.  
Erase Error (E_ERR) SR1[5]: The Erase Error Bit is used as an Erase operation success or failure indication. When  
the Erase Error bit is set to a 1 it indicates that there was an error in the last erase operation. This bit will also be  
set when the user attempts to erase an individual protected main memory sector. The Bulk Erase command will  
not set E_ERR if a protected sector is found during the command execution. When the Erase Error bit is set to a 1  
this bit can be reset to 0 with the Clear Status Register (CLSR) command. This is a read-only bit and is not affected  
by the WRR command.  
Block Protection (BP2, BP1, BP0) SR1[4:2]: These bits define the main flash array area to be software-protected  
against program and erase commands. The BP bits are either volatile or non-volatile, depending on the state of  
the BP non-volatile bit (BPNV) in the configuration register. When one or more of the BP bits is set to 1, the  
relevant memory area is protected against program and erase. The Bulk Erase (BE) command can be executed  
only when the BP bits are cleared to 0’s. See “Block protection” on page 67 for a description of how the BP bit  
values select the memory array area protected. The BP bits have the same non-volatile endurance as the main  
flash array.  
Write Enable Latch (WEL) SR1[1]: The WEL bit must be set to 1 to enable program, write, or erase operations as  
a means to provide protection against inadvertent changes to memory or register values. The Write Enable  
(WREN) command execution sets the Write Enable Latch to a 1 to allow any program, erase, or write commands  
to execute afterwards. The Write Disable (WRDI) command can be used to set the Write Enable Latch to a 0 to  
prevent all program, erase, and write commands from execution. The WEL bit is cleared to 0 at the end of any  
successful program, write, or erase operation. Following a failed operation the WEL bit may remain set and  
should be cleared with a WRDI command following a CLSR command. After a power down/power up sequence,  
hardware reset, or software reset, the Write Enable Latch is set to a 0 The WRR command does not affect this bit.  
Write In Progress (WIP) SR1[0]: Indicates whether the device is performing a program, write, erase operation,  
or any other operation, during which a new operation command will be ignored. When the bit is set to a 1 the  
device is busy performing an operation. While WIP is 1, only Read Status (RDSR1 or RDSR2), Erase Suspend (ERSP),  
Program Suspend (PGSP), Clear Status Register (CLSR), and Software Reset (RESET) commands may be  
accepted. ERSP and PGSP will only be accepted if memory array erase or program operations are in progress. The  
status register E_ERR and P_ERR bits are updated while WIP = 1. When P_ERR or E_ERR bits are set to one, the  
WIP bit will remain set to one indicating the device remains busy and unable to receive new operation commands.  
A Clear Status Register (CLSR) command must be received to return the device to standby mode. When the WIP  
bit is cleared to 0 no operation is in progress. This is a read-only bit.  
Datasheet  
57 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
7.6.2  
Configuration register 1 (CR1)  
Related Commands: Read Configuration Register (RDCR 35h), Write Registers (WRR 01h). The Configuration  
Register bits can be changed using the WRR command with sixteen input cycles.  
The configuration register controls certain interface and data protection functions.  
Table 21  
Configuration register (CR1)  
De-  
Bits  
Field name  
Function  
Type  
fault  
state  
Description  
7
6
LC1  
LC0  
Latency Code  
Non-volatile  
0
0
Selects number of initial read  
latency cycles  
See Latency Code Tables  
5
TBPROT  
Configures Start of Block  
Protection  
OTP  
0
1 = BP starts at bottom (Low  
address)  
0 = BP starts at top (High  
address)  
4
3
DNU  
BPNV  
DNU  
DNU  
OTP  
0
0
Do not Use  
Configures BP2-0 in Status  
Register  
1 = Volatile  
0 = Non-volatile  
2
1
RFU  
QUAD  
RFU  
RFU  
0
0
Reserved for Future Use  
Puts the device into Quad I/O Non-volatile  
operation  
1 = Quad  
0 = Dual or Serial  
0
FREEZE  
Lock current state of BP2-0 bits in  
Status Register, TBPROT in  
Configuration Register, and OTP  
regions  
Volatile  
0
1 = Block Protection and OTP  
locked  
0 = Block Protection and OTP  
un-locked  
Latency Code (LC) CR1[7:6]: The Latency Code selects the number of mode and dummy cycles between the end  
of address and the start of read data output for all read commands.  
Some read commands send mode bits following the address to indicate that the next command will be of the  
same type with an implied, rather than an explicit, instruction. The next command thus does not provide an  
instruction byte, only a new address and mode bits. This reduces the time needed to send each command when  
the same command type is repeated in a sequence of commands.  
Dummy cycles provide additional latency that is needed to complete the initial read access of the flash array  
before data can be returned to the host system. Some read commands require additional latency cycles as the  
SCK frequency is increased.  
The following latency code tables provide different latency settings that are configured by Infineon. The High  
Performance versus the Enhanced High Performance settings are selected by the ordering part number.  
Where mode or latency (dummy) cycles are shown in the tables as a dash, that read command is not supported  
at the frequency shown. Read is supported only up to 50 MHz but the same latency value is assigned in each  
latency code and the command may be used when the device is operated at 50 MHz with any latency code  
setting. Similarly, only the Fast Read command is supported up to 133 MHz but the same 10b latency code is used  
for Fast Read up to 133 MHz and for the other dual and quad read commands up to 104 MHz. It is not necessary  
to change the latency code from a higher to a lower frequency when operating at lower frequencies where a  
particular command is supported. The latency code values for a higher frequency can be used for accesses at  
lower frequencies.  
The High Performance settings provide latency options that are the same or faster than alternate source SPI  
memories. These settings provide mode bits only for the Quad I/O Read command.  
The Enhanced High Performance settings similarly provide latency options the same or faster than additional  
alternate source SPI memories and adds mode bits for the Dual I/O Read, DDR Fast Read, and DDR  
Dual I/O Read commands.  
Datasheet  
58 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
Read DDR Data Learning Pattern (DLP) bits may be placed within the dummy cycles immediately before the start  
of read data, if there are 5 or more dummy cycles. See “Read memory array commands” on page 90 for more  
information on the DLP.  
Table 22  
Latency codes for SDR high performance  
Quad I/O  
Read  
(EBh, ECh)  
Read  
Fast Read  
(0Bh, 0Ch)  
Read Dual Out Read Quad Out Dual I/O Read  
Freq  
.
LC  
(03h, 13h)  
(3Bh, 3Ch)  
(6Bh, 6Ch)  
Dum-  
(BBh, BCh)  
(MH  
z)  
Dum-  
Dum-  
Dum-  
Dum- Mod Dum-  
Mode  
Mode  
Mode  
Mode  
Mode  
my  
0
my  
0
my  
0
my  
0
my  
4
e
2
2
2
2
my  
1
4
4
5
50 11  
80 00  
90 01  
104 10  
133 10  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
8
8
8
4
8
8
5
8
8
8
8
6
Table 23  
Latency codes for DDR high performance  
DDR Fast Read  
(0Dh, 0Eh)  
DDR Dual I/O Read  
(BDh, BEh)  
Read DDR Quad I/O  
(EDh, EEh)  
Freq.  
LC  
(MHz)  
Mode  
Dummy  
Mode  
Dummy  
Mode  
Dummy  
50  
66  
66  
66  
11  
00  
01  
10  
0
0
0
0
4
5
6
7
0
0
0
0
4
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
3
6
7
8
Table 24  
Latency codes for SDR enhanced high performance  
Read Quad  
Out  
(6Bh, 6Ch)  
Read  
Fast Read  
(0Bh, 0Ch)  
Read Dual Out  
(3Bh, 3Ch)  
Dual I/O Read QuadI/ORead  
Freq.  
LC  
(03h, 13h)  
(BBh, BCh)  
(EBh, ECh)  
Dum-  
(MHz)  
Dum-  
Dum-  
Dum-  
Dum-  
Dum-  
Mode  
Mode  
Mode  
Mode  
Mode Mode  
my  
0
my  
0
my  
my  
my  
my  
1
50 11  
80 00  
90 01  
104 10  
133 10  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
8
8
0
0
0
0
0
8
8
8
4
4
4
4
0
0
1
2
2
2
2
2
8
8
8
8
4
4
5
Datasheet  
59 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
Table 25  
Latency codes for DDR enhanced high performance  
DDR Fast Read  
(0Dh, 0Eh)  
DDR Dual I/O Read  
(BDh, BEh)  
Read DDR Quad I/O  
(EDh, EEh)  
Freq.  
LC  
(MHz)  
Mode  
Dummy  
Mode  
Dummy  
Mode  
Dummy  
50  
66  
66  
66  
80  
80  
80  
11  
00  
01  
10  
00  
01  
10  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
4
5
2
4
5
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
5
6
4
5
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
6
7
8
6
7
8
Top or Bottom Protection (TBPROT) CR1[5]: This bit defines the operation of the Block Protection bits BP2,  
BP1, and BP0 in the Status Register. As described in the status register section, the BP2-0 bits allow the user to  
optionally protect a portion of the array, ranging from 1/64, 1/4, 1/2, etc., up to the entire array. When TBPROT is  
set to a 0 the Block Protection is defined to start from the top (maximum address) of the array. When TBPROT is  
set to a 1 the Block Protection is defined to start from the bottom (zero address) of the array. The TBPROT bit is  
OTP and set to a 0 when shipped from Infineon. If TBPROT is programmed to 1, an attempt to change it back to  
0 will fail and set the Program Error bit (P_ERR in SR1[6]).  
The desired state of TBPROT must be selected during the initial configuration of the device during system  
manufacture; before the first program or erase operation on the main flash array. TBPROT must not be  
programmed after programming or erasing is done in the main flash array.  
CR1[4]: Reserved for Future Use  
Block Protection Non-volatile (BPNV) CR1[3]: The BPNV bit defines whether or not the BP2-0 bits in the Status  
Register are volatile or non-volatile. The BPNV bit is OTP and cleared to a0 with the BP bits cleared to 000 when  
shipped from Infineon. When BPNV is set to a 0 the BP2-0 bits in the Status Register are non-volatile. When BPNV  
is set to a 1 the BP2-0 bits in the Status Register are volatile and will be reset to binary 111 after POR, hardware  
reset, or command reset. If BPNV is programmed to 1, an attempt to change it back to 0 will fail and set the  
Program Error bit (P_ERR in SR1[6]).  
CR1[2]: Reserved for Future Use.  
Quad Data Width (QUAD) CR1[1]: When set to 1, this bit switches the data width of the device to 4 bit - Quad  
mode. That is, WP# becomes I/O2 and HOLD# becomes I/O3. The WP# and HOLD# inputs are not monitored for  
their normal functions and are internally set to high (inactive). The commands for Serial, Dual Output, and Dual  
I/O Read still function normally but, there is no need to drive WP# and Hold# inputs for those commands when  
switching between commands using different data path widths. The QUAD bit must be set to one when using  
Read Quad Out, Quad I/O Read, Read DDR Quad I/O, and Quad Page Program commands. The QUAD bit is  
non-volatile.  
Freeze Protection (FREEZE) CR1[0]: The Freeze Bit, when set to 1, locks the current state of the BP2-0 bits in  
Status Register, the TBPROT and TBPARM bits in the Configuration Register, and the OTP address space. This  
prevents writing, programming, or erasing these areas. As long as the FREEZE bit remains cleared to logic 0 the  
other bits of the Configuration Register, including FREEZE, are writable, and the OTP address space is program-  
mable. Once the FREEZE bit has been written to a logic 1 it can only be cleared to a logic 0 by a power-off to  
power-on cycle or a hardware reset. Software reset will not affect the state of the FREEZE bit. The FREEZE bit is  
volatile and the default state of FREEZE after power-on is 0. The FREEZE bit can be set in parallel with updating  
other values in CR1 by a single WRR command.  
Note  
43.When using DDR I/O commands with the Data Learning Pattern (DLP) enabled, a Latency Code that provides  
5 or more dummy cycles should be selected to allow 1 cycle of additional time for the host to stop driving  
before the memory starts driving the 4 cycle DLP. It is recommended to use LC 10 for DDR Fast Read, LC 01 for  
DDR Dual I/O Read, and LC 00 for DDR Quad I/O Read, if the Data Learning Pattern (DLP) for DDR is used.  
Datasheet  
60 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
7.6.3  
Status register 2 (SR2)  
Related Commands: Read Status Register 2 (RDSR2 07h).  
Table 26  
Status register-2 (SR2)  
Default  
state  
Bits  
Field name Function  
Type  
Description  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
ES  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Erase  
Suspend  
Volatile, Read  
only  
1 = In erase suspend mode  
0 = Not in erase suspend mode  
0
PS  
Program  
Suspend  
Volatile, Read  
only  
0
1 = In program suspend mode  
0 = Not in program suspend mode  
Erase Suspend (ES) SR2[1]: The Erase Suspend bit is used to determine when the device is in Erase Suspend  
mode. This is a status bit that cannot be written. When Erase Suspend bit is set to 1, the device is in erase suspend  
mode. When Erase Suspend bit is cleared to 0, the device is not in erase suspend mode. Refer to Erase Suspend  
and Resume Commands (75h) (7Ah) for details about the Erase Suspend/Resume commands.  
Program Suspend (PS) SR2[0]: The Program Suspend bit is used to determine when the device is in Program  
Suspend mode. This is a status bit that cannot be written. When Program Suspend bit is set to 1, the device is in  
program suspend mode. When the Program Suspend bit is cleared to 0, the device is not in program suspend  
mode. Refer to “Program suspend (PGSP 85h) and resume (PGRS 8Ah)” on page 108 for details.  
7.6.4  
AutoBoot register  
Related Commands: AutoBoot Read (ABRD 14h) and AutoBoot Write (ABWR 15h).  
The AutoBoot Register provides a means to automatically read boot code as part of the power on reset, hardware  
reset, or software reset process.  
Table 27  
AutoBoot register  
Default  
state  
Bits  
Field name  
Function  
Type  
Description  
31 to 9  
ABSA  
AutoBoot Start Non-volatile 000000h 512 byte boundary address for the  
Address  
start of boot code access  
8 to 1  
0
ABSD  
ABE  
AutoBoot Start Non-volatile  
Delay  
00h  
0
Number of initial delay cycles  
between CS# going low and the first  
bit of boot code being transferred  
AutoBoot Enable Non-volatile  
1 = AutoBoot is enabled  
0 = AutoBoot is not enabled  
7.6.5  
Bank address register  
Related Commands: Bank Register Access (BRAC B9h), Write Register (WRR 01h), Bank Register Read (BRRD 16h)  
and Bank Register Write (BRWR 17h).  
The Bank Address register supplies additional high order bits of the main flash array byte boundary address for  
legacy commands that supply only the low order 24 bits of address. The Bank Address is used as the high bits of  
Datasheet  
61 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
address (above A23) for all 3-byte address commands when EXTADD=0. The Bank Address is not used when  
EXTADD = 1 and traditional 3-byte address commands are instead required to provide all four bytes of address.  
Table 28  
Bank address register (BAR)  
Field  
Default  
state  
Bits  
Function  
Type  
Description  
name  
7
EXTADD  
Extended  
Address Enable  
Volatile  
0b  
1 = 4-byte (32-bits) addressing required from  
command.  
0 = 3-byte (24-bits) addressing from command +  
Bank Address  
6 to 2  
1
0
RFU  
BA25  
BA24  
Reserved  
Bank Address  
Bank Address  
Volatile  
Volatile  
Volatile  
00000b Reserved for Future Use  
0
0
A25 for 512 Mb device  
A24 for 512 Mb device  
Extended Address (EXTADD) BAR[7]: EXTADD controls the address field size for legacy SPI commands. By default  
(power up reset, hardware reset, and software reset), it is cleared to 0 for 3 bytes (24 bits) of address. When set to  
1, the legacy commands will require 4 bytes (32 bits) for the address field. This is a volatile bit.  
7.6.6  
ECC status register (ECCSR)  
Related Commands: ECC Read (ECCRD 18h). ECCSR does not have user programmable non-volatile bits. All  
defined bits are volatile read only status. The default state of these bits are set by hardware. See “Automatic  
ECC” on page 106.  
The status of ECC in each ECC unit is provided by the 8-bit ECC Status Register (ECCSR). The ECC Register Read  
command is written followed by an ECC unit address. The contents of the status register then indicates, for the  
selected ECC unit, whether there is an error in the ECC unit eight bit error correction code, the ECC unit of 16 Bytes  
of data, or that ECC is disabled for that ECC unit.  
Table 29  
ECC status register (ECCSR)  
Field  
Default  
state  
Bits  
Function  
name  
Type  
Description  
7 to 3  
2
RFU  
EECC  
Reserved  
Error in ECC  
0
0
Reserved for Future Use  
Volatile, Read  
only  
1 = Single Bit Error found in the ECC  
unit eight bit error correction code  
0 = No error.  
1
0
EECCD Error in ECC unit Volatile, Read  
0
0
1 = Single Bit Error corrected in ECC  
unit data.  
data  
only  
0 = No error.  
ECCDI  
ECC Disabled  
Volatile, Read  
only  
1 = ECC is disabled in the selected ECC  
unit.  
0 = ECC is enabled in the selected ECC  
unit.  
ECCSR[2] = 1 indicates an error was corrected in the ECC. ECCSR[1] = 1 indicates an error was corrected in the ECC  
unit data. ECCSR[0] = 1 indicates the ECC is disabled. The default state of “0” for all these bits indicates no failures  
and ECC is enabled.  
ECCSR[7:3] are reserved. These have undefined high or low values that can change from one ECC status read to  
another. These bits should be treated as “don’t care” and ignored by any software reading status.  
Datasheet  
62 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
7.6.7  
ASP register (ASPR)  
Related Commands: ASP Read (ASPRD 2Bh) and ASP Program (ASPP 2Fh).  
The ASP register is a 16-bit OTP memory location used to permanently configure the behavior of Advanced Sector  
Protection (ASP) features.  
Table 30  
ASP register (ASPR)  
Default  
state  
Bits Field name  
Function  
Type  
Description  
Reserved for Future Use  
15 to 9  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
OTP  
OTP  
OTP  
OTP  
OTP  
OTP  
OTP  
OTP  
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Note [44] Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
1
Reserved for Future Use  
Note [44] Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
RFU  
RFU  
Reserved for Future Use  
PWDMLB  
Password  
Protection  
Mode Lock Bit  
1
1
1
0 = Password Protection Mode permanently  
enabled.  
1 = Password Protection Mode not permanently  
enabled.  
1
0
PSTMLB  
RFU  
Persistent  
Protection  
Mode Lock Bit  
OTP  
OTP  
0 = Persistent Protection Mode permanently  
enabled.  
1 = Persistent Protection Mode not permanently  
enabled.  
Reserved  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use (RFU) ASPR[15:3, 0].  
Password Protection Mode Lock Bit (PWDMLB) ASPR[2]: When programmed to 0, the Password Protection  
Mode is permanently selected.  
Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit (PSTMLB) ASPR[1]: When programmed to 0, the Persistent Protection  
Mode is permanently selected. PWDMLB and PSTMLB are mutually exclusive, only one may be programmed to  
zero.  
7.6.8  
Password register (PASS)  
Related Commands: Password Read (PASSRD E7h) and Password Program (PASSP E8h).  
Table 31  
Password register (PASS)  
Field  
Bits  
Function  
Type  
Default state  
Description  
name  
63 to 0  
PWD  
Hidden  
Password  
OTP  
FFFFFFFF-FFFFF Non-volatile OTP storage of 64-bit password. The  
FFFh  
password is no longer readable after the password  
protection mode is selected by programming ASP  
register bit 2 to zero.  
Notes  
44.Default value depends on ordering part number, see “Initial delivery state” on page 154.  
Datasheet  
63 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
7.6.9  
PPB lock register (PPBL)  
Related Commands: PPB Lock Read (PLBRD A7h, PLBWR A6h)  
Table 32  
PPB lock register (PPBL)  
Field  
Bits  
Function  
Type  
Default state  
Description  
name  
7 to 1  
0
RFU  
Reserved  
Volatile  
00h  
Reserved for Future Use  
PPBLOCK Protect PPB Volatile  
Array  
Persistent Protection  
Mode = 1  
Password Protection  
Mode = 0  
0 = PPB array protected until next  
power cycle or hardware reset  
1 = PPB array may be programmed or  
erased.  
7.6.10  
PPB access register (PPBAR)  
Related Commands: PPB Read (PPBRD E2h)  
Table 33  
PPB access register (PPBAR)  
Field name Function  
PPB  
De-  
Bits  
Type  
fault  
state  
Description  
7 to 0  
Read or Program Non-volatile  
per sector PPB  
FFh 00h = PPB for the sector addressed by the  
PPBRD or PPBP command is programmed to  
0, protecting that sector from program or  
erase operations.  
FFh = PPB for the sector addressed by the  
PPBRD or PPBP command is erased to 1, not  
protecting that sector from program or erase  
operations.  
7.6.11  
DYB access register (DYBAR)  
Related Commands: DYB Read (DYBRD E0h) and DYB Program (DYBP E1h).  
Table 34  
DYB access register (DYBAR)  
Field  
Default  
state  
Bits  
Function  
Type  
Description  
name  
7 to 0  
DYB  
Read or  
Write per  
sector DYB  
Volatile  
FFh  
00h = DYB for the sector addressed by the DYBRD or  
DYBP command is cleared to 0, protecting that sector  
from program or erase operations.  
FFh = DYB for the sector addressed by the DYBRD or  
DYBP command is set to 1, not protecting that sector  
from program or erase operations.  
7.6.12  
SPI DDR data learning registers  
Related Commands: Program NVDLR (PNVDLR 43h), Write VDLR (WVDLR 4Ah), Data Learning Pattern Read  
(DLPRD 41h).  
The Data Learning Pattern (DLP) resides in an 8-bit Non-volatile Data Learning Register (NVDLR) as well as an 8-bit  
Volatile Data Learning Register (VDLR). When shipped from Infineon, the NVDLR value is 00h. Once programmed,  
the NVDLR cannot be reprogrammed or erased; a copy of the data pattern in the NVDLR will also be written to the  
VDLR. The VDLR can be written to at any time, but on reset or power cycles the data pattern will revert back to  
what is in the NVDLR. During the learning phase described in the SPI DDR modes, the DLP will come from the  
VDLR. Each I/O will output the same DLP value for every clock edge. For example, if the DLP is 34h (or binary  
00110100) then during the first clock edge all I/O’s will output 0; subsequently, the 2nd clock edge all I/O’s will  
output 0, the 3rd will output 1, etc.  
Datasheet  
64 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Address space maps  
When the VDLR value is 00h, no preamble data pattern is presented during the dummy phase in the DDR  
commands.  
Table 35  
Bits  
Non-volatile data learning register (NVDLR)  
Field  
Function  
Type  
Default state  
Description  
name  
7 to 0  
NVDLP Non-volatile OTP  
00h  
OTP value that may be transferred to the host  
during DDR read command latency (dummy)  
cycles to provide a training pattern to help  
the host more accurately center the data  
capture point in the received data bits.  
Data  
Learning  
Pattern  
Table 36  
Bits  
Volatile data learning register (NVDLR)  
Field  
Function  
Type  
Default state  
Description  
name  
7 to 0  
VDLP  
VolatileData Volatile Takes the value of Volatile copy of the NVDLP used to enable and  
Learning  
Pattern  
NVDLR during POR deliver the Data Learning Pattern (DLP) to the  
or Reset  
outputs. The VDLP may be changed by the  
host during system operation.  
Datasheet  
65 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Data protection  
8
Data protection  
8.1  
Secure silicon region (OTP)  
The device has a 1024-byte One Time Program (OTP) address space that is separate from the main flash array.  
The OTP area is divided into 32, individually lockable, 32-byte aligned and length regions.  
The OTP memory space is intended for increased system security. OTP values can “mate” a flash component with  
the system CPU/ASIC to prevent device substitution. See “OTP address space” on page 54, “One time program  
array commands” on page 113, and “OTP read (OTPR 4Bh)” on page 113.  
8.1.1  
Reading OTP memory space  
The OTP Read command uses the same protocol as Fast Read. OTP Read operations outside the valid 1-kB OTP  
address range will yield indeterminate data.  
8.1.2  
Programming OTP memory space  
The protocol of the OTP programming command is the same as Page Program. The OTP Program command can  
be issued multiple times to any given OTP address, but this address space can never be erased.  
Automatic ECC is programmed on the first programming operation to each 16-byte region. Programming within  
a 16-byte region more than once disables the ECC. It is recommended to program each 16-byte portion of each  
32-byte region once so that ECC remains enabled to provide the best data integrity.  
The valid address range for OTP Program is depicted in Figure 45. OTP Program operations outside the valid OTP  
address range will be ignored and the WEL in SR1 will remain high (set to 1). OTP Program operations while  
FREEZE = 1 will fail with P_ERR in SR1 set to 1.  
8.1.3  
Infineon programmed random number  
Infineon standard practice is to program the low order 16 bytes of the OTP memory space (locations 0x0 to 0xF)  
with a 128-bit random number using the Linear Congruential Random Number Method. The seed value for the  
algorithm is a random number concatenated with the day and time of tester insertion.  
8.1.4  
Lock bytes  
The LSb of each Lock byte protects the lowest address region related to the byte, the MSb protects the highest  
address region related to the byte. The next higher address byte similarly protects the next higher 8 regions. The  
LSb bit of the lowest address Lock Byte protects the higher address 16 bytes of the lowest address region. In other  
words, the LSb of location 0x10 protects all the Lock Bytes and RFU bytes in the lowest address region from  
further programming. See “OTP address space” on page 54.  
8.2  
Write enable command  
The Write Enable (WREN) command must be written prior to any command that modifies non-volatile data. The  
WREN command sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit. The WEL bit is cleared to 0 (disables writes) during  
power-up, hardware reset, or after the device completes the following commands:  
• Reset  
• Page Program (PP)  
• Sector Erase (SE)  
• Bulk Erase (BE)  
• Write Disable (WRDI)  
• Write Registers (WRR)  
• Quad-input Page Programming (QPP)  
• OTP Byte Programming (OTPP)  
Datasheet  
66 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Data protection  
8.3  
Block protection  
The Block Protect bits (Status Register bits BP2, BP1, BP0) in combination with the Configuration Register  
TBPROT bit can be used to protect an address range of the main flash array from program and erase operations.  
The size of the range is determined by the value of the BP bits and the upper or lower starting point of the range  
is selected by the TBPROT bit of the configuration register.  
Table 37  
Upper array start of protection (TBPROT = 0)  
Status Register Content  
Protected Memory (KB)  
FL512S  
Protected Fraction of Memory  
Array  
BP2  
BP1  
BP0  
512 Mb  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
None  
0
Upper 64th  
Upper 32nd  
Upper 16th  
Upper 8th  
Upper 4th  
Upper Half  
All Sectors  
1024  
2048  
4096  
8192  
16384  
32768  
65536  
Table 38  
Lower array start of protection (TBPROT = 1)  
Status Register Content  
Protected Memory (KB)  
FL512S  
Protected Fraction of Memory  
Array  
BP2  
BP1  
BP0  
512 Mb  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
None  
0
Lower 64th  
Lower 32nd  
Lower 16th  
Lower 8th  
Lower 4th  
Lower Half  
All Sectors  
1024  
2048  
4096  
8192  
16384  
32768  
65536  
When Block Protection is enabled (i.e., any BP2-0 are set to 1), Advanced Sector Protection (ASP) can still be used  
to protect sectors not protected by the Block Protection scheme. In the case that both ASP and Block Protection  
are used on the same sector the logical OR of ASP and Block Protection related to the sector is used. Recommen-  
dation: ASP and Block Protection should not be used concurrently. Use one or the other, but not both.  
8.3.1  
Freeze bit  
Bit 0 of the Configuration Register is the FREEZE bit. The FREEZE bit locks the BP2-0 bits in Status Register 1 and  
the TBPROT bit in the Configuration Register to their value at the time the FREEZE bit is set to 1. Once the FREEZE  
bit has been written to a logic 1 it cannot be cleared to a logic 0 until a power-on-reset is executed. As long as the  
FREEZE bit is cleared to logic 0 the status register BP bits and the TBPROT bit of the Configuration Register are  
writable. The FREEZE bit also protects the entire OTP memory space from programming when set to 1. Any  
attempt to change the BP bits with the WRR command while FREEZE = 1 is ignored and no error status is set.  
8.3.2  
Write protect signal  
The Write Protect (WP#) input in combination with the Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) bit provide hardware  
input signal controlled protection. When WP# is Low and SRWD is set to 1 the Status and Configuration register  
is protected from alteration. This prevents disabling or changing the protection defined by the Block Protect bits.  
Datasheet  
67 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Data protection  
8.4  
Advanced sector protection  
Advanced Sector Protection (ASP) is the name used for a set of independent hardware and software methods  
used to disable or enable programming or erase operations, individually, in any or all sectors. An overview of  
these methods is shown in Figure 46.  
Block Protection and ASP protection settings for each sector are logically OR’d to define the protection for each  
sector, i.e. if either mechanism is protecting a sector the sector cannot be programmed or erased. Refer to “Block  
protection” on page 67 for full details of the BP2-0 bits.  
ASP Register  
One Time Programmable  
Password Method Persistent Method  
(ASPR[2]=0)  
(ASPR[1]=0)  
6.) Password Method requires a  
password to set PPB Lock to “1”  
to enable program or erase of  
PPB bits  
7.) Persistent Method only allows  
PPB Lock to be cleared to “0” to  
prevent program or erase of PPB  
bits. Power off or hardware reset  
required to set PPB Lock to “1”  
64-  
bit Password  
(One Time Protect)  
4.) PPB Lock bit is volatile and  
defaults to “1” (persistent  
mode).or “0” (password mode)  
upon reset  
PBB Lock Bit  
“0” = PPBs locked  
“1”=PPBs unlocked  
5.) PPB Lock = “0” locks all PPBs  
to their current state  
Persistent  
Protection Bits  
(PPB)  
Dynamic  
Protection Bits  
(DYB)  
Memory Array  
Sector 0  
Sector 1  
Sector 2  
PPB 0  
PPB 1  
PPB 2  
DYB 0  
DYB 1  
DYB 2  
Sector N-2  
Sector N-1  
Sector N  
PPB N-2  
PPB N-1  
PPB N  
DYB N-2  
DYB N-1  
DYB N  
3.) DYB are volatile bits  
1.) N = Highest Address Sector,  
a sector is protected if its PPB =”0”  
or its DYB = “0”  
PPB are programmed individually  
but erased as a group  
2.)  
Figure 46  
Advanced sector protection overview  
Every main flash array sector has a non-volatile (PPB) and a volatile (DYB) protection bit associated with it. When  
either bit is 0, the sector is protected from program and erase operations.  
The PPB bits are protected from program and erase when the PPB Lock bit is 0. There are two methods for  
managing the state of the PPB Lock bit, Persistent Protection and Password Protection.  
The Persistent Protection method sets the PPB Lock bit to 1 during POR, or Hardware Reset so that the PPB bits  
are unprotected by a device reset. There is a command to clear the PPB Lock bit to 0 to protect the PPB. There is  
no command in the Persistent Protection method to set the PPB Lock bit to 1, therefore the PPB Lock bit will  
remain at 0 until the next power-off or hardware reset. The Persistent Protection method allows boot code the  
option of changing sector protection by programming or erasing the PPB, then protecting the PPB from further  
change for the remainder of normal system operation by clearing the PPB Lock bit to 0. This is sometimes called  
Boot-code controlled sector protection.  
The Password method clears the PPB Lock bit to 0 during POR, or Hardware Reset to protect the PPB. A 64-bit  
password may be permanently programmed and hidden for the password method. A command can be used to  
provide a password for comparison with the hidden password. If the password matches, the PPB Lock bit is set  
to 1 to unprotect the PPB. A command can be used to clear the PPB Lock bit to 0. This method requires use of a  
password to control PPB protection.  
The selection of the PPB Lock bit management method is made by programming OTP bits in the ASP Register so  
as to permanently select the method used.  
Datasheet  
68 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Data protection  
8.4.1  
ASP register  
The ASP register is used to permanently configure the behavior of Advanced Sector Protection (ASP) features.  
See Table 29.  
As shipped from the factory, all devices default ASP to the Persistent Protection mode, with all sectors unpro-  
tected, when power is applied. The device programmer or host system must then choose which sector protection  
method to use. Programming either of the, one-time programmable, Protection Mode Lock Bits, locks the part  
permanently in the selected mode:  
• ASPR[2:1] = 11 = No ASP mode selected, Persistent Protection Mode is the default.  
• ASPR[2:1] = 10 = Persistent Protection Mode permanently selected.  
• ASPR[2:1] = 01 = Password Protection Mode permanently selected.  
• ASPR[2:1] = 00 = Illegal condition, attempting to program both bits to zero results in a programming failure.  
ASP register programming rules:  
• If the password mode is chosen, the password must be programmed prior to setting the Protection Mode Lock  
Bits.  
• Once the Protection Mode is selected, the Protection Mode Lock Bits are permanently protected from  
programming and no further changes to the ASP register is allowed.  
The programming time of the ASP Register is the same as the typical page programming time. The system can  
determine the status of the ASP register programming operation by reading the WIP bit in the Status Register.  
See “Status register 1 (SR1)” on page 56 for information on WIP.  
After selecting a sector protection method, each sector can operate in each of the following states:  
• Dynamically Locked — A sector is protected and can be changed by a simple command.  
• Persistently Locked — A sector is protected and cannot be changed if its PPB Bit is 0.  
• Unlocked — The sector is unprotected and can be changed by a simple command.  
8.4.2  
Persistent protection bits  
The Persistent Protection Bits (PPB) are located in a separate non-volatile flash array. One of the PPB bits is  
related to each sector. When a PPB is 0, its related sector is protected from program and erase operations. The  
PPB are programmed individually but must be erased as a group, similar to the way individual words may be  
programmed in the main array but an entire sector must be erased at the same time. The PPB have the same  
program and erase endurance as the main flash memory array. Preprogramming and verification prior to erasure  
are handled by the device.  
Programming a PPB bit requires the typical page programming time. Erasing all the PPBs requires typical sector  
erase time. During PPB bit programming and PPB bit erasing, status is available by reading the Status register.  
Reading of a PPB bit requires the initial access time of the device.  
Notes  
Each PPB is individually programmed to 0 and all are erased to 1 in parallel.  
If the PPB Lock bit is 0, the PPB Program or PPB Erase command does not execute and fails without programming  
or erasing the PPB.  
The state of the PPB for a given sector can be verified by using the PPB Read command.  
8.4.3  
Dynamic protection bits  
Dynamic Protection Bits are volatile and unique for each sector and can be individually modified. DYB only  
control the protection for sectors that have their PPB set to 1. By issuing the DYB Write command, a DYB is cleared  
to 0 or set to 1, thus placing each sector in the protected or unprotected state respectively. This feature allows  
software to easily protect sectors against inadvertent changes, yet does not prevent the easy removal of  
protection when changes are needed. The DYBs can be set or cleared as often as needed as they are volatile bits.  
Datasheet  
69 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Data protection  
8.4.4  
PPB lock bit (PPBL[0])  
The PPB Lock Bit is a volatile bit for protecting all PPB bits. When cleared to 0, it locks all PPBs and when set to  
1, it allows the PPBs to be changed.  
The PLBWR command is used to clear the PPB Lock bit to 0. The PPB Lock Bit must be cleared to 0 only after all  
the PPBs are configured to the desired settings.  
In Persistent Protection mode, the PPB Lock is set to 1 during POR or a hardware reset. When cleared to 0, no  
software command sequence can set the PPB Lock bit to 1, only another hardware reset or power-up can set the  
PPB Lock bit.  
In the Password Protection mode, the PPB Lock bit is cleared to 0 during POR or a hardware reset. The PPB Lock  
bit can only be set to 1 by the Password Unlock command.  
8.4.5  
Sector protection states summary  
Each sector can be in one of the following protection states:  
• Unlocked — The sector is unprotected and protection can be changed by a simple command. The protection  
state defaults to unprotected after a power cycle, software reset, or hardware reset.  
• Dynamically Locked — A sector is protected and protection can be changed by a simple command. The  
protection state is not saved across a power cycle or reset.  
• Persistently Locked — A sector is protected and protection can only be changed if the PPB Lock Bit is set to 1.  
The protection state is non-volatile and saved across a power cycle or reset. Changing the protection state  
requires programming and or erase of the PPB bits  
Table 39  
Sector protection states  
Protection Bit Values  
Sector State  
PPB Lock  
PPB  
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
DYB  
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Unprotected – PPB and DYB are changeable  
Protected – PPB and DYB are changeable  
Protected – PPB and DYB are changeable  
Protected – PPB and DYB are changeable  
Unprotected – PPB not changeable, DYB is changeable  
Protected – PPB not changeable, DYB is changeable  
Protected – PPB not changeable, DYB is changeable  
Protected – PPB not changeable, DYB is changeable  
8.4.6  
Persistent protection mode  
The Persistent Protection method sets the PPB Lock bit to 1 during POR or Hardware Reset so that the PPB bits  
are unprotected by a device hardware reset. Software reset does not affect the PPB Lock bit. The PLBWR  
command can clear the PPB Lock bit to 0 to protect the PPB. There is no command to set the PPB Lock bit  
therefore the PPB Lock bit will remain at 0 until the next power-off or hardware reset.  
8.4.7  
Password protection mode  
Password Protection Mode allows an even higher level of security than the Persistent Sector Protection Mode, by  
requiring a 64-bit password for unlocking the PPB Lock bit. In addition to this password requirement, after power  
up and hardware reset, the PPB Lock bit is cleared to 0 to ensure protection at power-up. Successful execution  
of the Password Unlock command by entering the entire password clears the PPB Lock bit, allowing for sector  
PPB modifications.  
Password Protection Notes  
• Once the Password is programmed and verified, the Password Mode (ASPR[2]=0) must be set in order to prevent  
reading the password.  
Datasheet  
70 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Data protection  
• The Password Program Command is only capable of programming ‘0’s. Programming a 1 after a cell is  
programmed as a 0 results in the cell left as a 0 with no programming error set.  
• The password is all 1’s when shipped from Infineon. It is located in its own memory space and is accessible  
through the use of the Password Program and Password Read commands.  
• All 64-bit password combinations are valid as a password.  
• The Password Mode, once programmed, prevents reading the 64-bit password and further password  
programming. All further program and read commands to the password region are disabled and these  
commands are ignored. There is no means to verify what the password is after the Password Mode Lock Bit is  
selected. Password verification is only allowed before selecting the Password Protection mode.  
• The Protection Mode Lock Bits are not erasable.  
• The exact password must be entered in order for the unlocking function to occur. If the password unlock  
command provided password does not match the hidden internal password, the unlock operation fails in the  
same manner as a programming operation on a protected sector. The P_ERR bit is set to one and the WIP Bit  
remains set. In this case it is a failure to change the state of the PPB Lock bit because it is still protected by the  
lack of a valid password.  
• The Password Unlock command cannot be accepted any faster than once every 100 µs ± 20 µs. This makes it  
take an unreasonably long time (58 million years) for a hacker to run through all the 64-bit combinations in an  
attempt to correctly match a password. The Read Status Register 1 command may be used to read the WIP bit  
to determine when the device has completed the password unlock command or is ready to accept a new  
password command. When a valid password is provided the password unlock command does not insert the  
100 µs delay before returning the WIP bit to zero.  
• If the password is lost after selecting the Password Mode, there is no way to set the PPB Lock bit.  
• ECC status may only be read from sectors that are readable. In read protection mode the addresses are forced  
to the boot sector address. ECC status is shown in that sector while read protection mode is active.  
Datasheet  
71 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
9
Commands  
All communication between the host system and the S25FL512S memory device is in the form of units called  
commands.  
All commands begin with an instruction that selects the type of information transfer or device operation to be  
performed. Commands may also have an address, instruction modifier, latency period, data transfer to the  
memory, or data transfer from the memory. All instruction, address, and data information is transferred serially  
between the host system and memory device.  
All instructions are transferred from host to memory as a single bit serial sequence on the SI signal.  
Single bit wide commands may provide an address or data sent only on the SI signal. Data may be sent back to  
the host serially on SO signal.  
Dual or Quad Output commands provide an address sent to the memory only on the SI signal. Data will be  
returned to the host as a sequence of bit pairs on I/O0 and I/O1 or four bit (nibble) groups on I/O0, I/O1, I/O2, and  
I/O3.  
Dual or Quad Input/Output (I/O) commands provide an address sent from the host as bit pairs on I/O0 and I/O1  
or, four bit (nibble) groups on I/O0, I/O1, I/O2, and I/O3. Data is returned to the host similarly as bit pairs on I/O0  
and I/O1 or, four bit (nibble) groups on I/O0, I/O1, I/O2, and I/O3.  
Commands are structured as follows:  
• Each command begins with an eight bit (byte) instruction.  
• The instruction may be stand alone or may be followed by address bits to select a location within one of several  
address spaces in the device. The address may be either a 24-bit or 32-bit byte boundary address.  
• The Serial Peripheral Interface with Multiple I/O provides the option for each transfer of address and data infor-  
mation to be done one, two, or four bits in parallel. This enables a trade off between the number of signal  
connections (I/O bus width) and the speed of information transfer. If the host system can support a two or four  
bit wide I/O bus the memory performance can be increased by using the instructions that provide parallel two  
bit (dual) or parallel four bit (quad) transfers.  
• The width of all transfers following the instruction are determined by the instruction sent.  
• All sIngle bits or parallel bit groups are transferred in most to least significant bit order.  
• Some instructions send instruction modifier (mode) bits following the address to indicate that the next  
command will be of the same type with an implied, rather than an explicit, instruction. The next command thus  
does not provide an instruction byte, only a new address and mode bits. This reduces the time needed to send  
each command when the same command type is repeated in a sequence of commands.  
• The address or mode bits may be followed by write data to be stored in the memory device or by a read latency  
period before read data is returned to the host.  
• Read latency may be zero to several SCK cycles (also referred to as dummy cycles).  
• All instruction, address, mode, and data information is transferred in byte granularity. Addresses are shifted  
into the device with the MSB first. All data is transferred with the lowest address byte sent first. Following bytes  
of data are sent in lowest to highest byte address order i.e. the byte address increments.  
• All attempts to read the flash memory array during a program, erase, or a write cycle (embedded operations)  
are ignored. The embedded operation will continue to execute without any affect. A very limited set of  
commands are accepted during an embedded operation. These are discussed in the individual command  
descriptions. While a program, erase, or write operation is in progress, it is recommended to check that the  
Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is 0 before issuing most commands to the device, to ensure the new command can  
be accepted.  
• Depending on the command, the time for execution varies. A command to read status information from an  
executing command is available to determine when the command completes execution and whether the  
command was successful.  
• Although host software in some cases is used to directly control the SPI interface signals, the hardware interfaces  
of the host system and the memory device generally handle the details of signal relationships and timing. For  
Datasheet  
72 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
this reason, signal relationships and timing are not covered in detail within this software interface focused  
section of the document. Instead, the focus is on the logical sequence of bits transferred in each command  
rather than the signal timing and relationships. Following are some general signal relationship descriptions to  
keep in mind. For additional information on the bit level format and signal timing relationships of commands,  
see “Command protocol” on page 18.  
- The host always controls the Chip Select (CS#), Serial Clock (SCK), and Serial Input (SI) - SI for single bit wide  
transfers. The memory drives Serial Output (SO) for single bit read transfers. The host and memory alternately  
drive the I/O0-I/O3 signals during Dual and Quad transfers.  
- All commands begin with the host selecting the memory by driving CS# low before the first rising edge of SCK.  
CS# is kept low throughout a command and when CS# is returned high the command ends. Generally, CS#  
remains low for eight bit transfer multiples to transfer byte granularity information. Some commands will not  
be accepted if CS# is returned high not at an 8 bit boundary.  
9.1  
Command set summary  
Extended addressing  
9.1.1  
To accommodate addressing above 128 Mb, there are three options:  
1. New instructions are provided with 4-byte address, used to access up to 32 Gb of memory.  
Instruction name  
4FAST_READ  
4READ  
Description  
Read Fast (4-byte Address)  
Read (4-byte Address)  
Code (Hex)  
0C  
13  
3C  
6C  
BC  
EC  
0E  
BE  
4DOR  
4QOR  
4DIOR  
4QIOR  
4DDRFR  
4DDRDIOR  
Read Dual Out (4-byte Address)  
Read Quad Out (4-byte Address)  
Dual I/O Read (4-byte Address)  
Quad I/O Read (4-byte Address)  
Read DDR Fast (4-byte Address)  
DDR Dual I/O Read (4-byte  
Address)  
4DDRQIOR  
DDR Quad I/O Read (4-byte  
Address)  
EE  
4PP  
4QPP  
Page Program (4-byte Address)  
Quad Page Program (4-byte  
Address)  
12  
34  
4SE  
Erase 256 kB (4-byte Address)  
DC  
2. For backward compatibility to the 3-byte address instructions, the standard instructions can be used in  
conjunction with the EXTADD Bit in the Bank Address Register (BAR[7]). By default BAR[7] is cleared to 0  
(following power up and hardware reset), to enable 3-byte (24-bit) addressing. When set to 1, the legacy  
Datasheet  
73 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
commands are changed to require 4 bytes (32 bits) for the address field. The following instructions can be used  
in conjunction with EXTADD bit to switch from 3 bytes to 4 bytes of address field.  
Instruction name  
READ  
Description  
Read (3-byte Address)  
Code (Hex)  
03  
0B  
3B  
6B  
BB  
EB  
0D  
BD  
FAST_READ  
DOR  
Read Fast (3-byte Address)  
Read Dual Out (3-byte Address)  
Read Quad Out (3-byte Address)  
Dual I/O Read (3-byte Address)  
Quad I/O Read (3-byte Address)  
Read DDR Fast (3-byte Address)  
QOR  
DIOR  
QIOR  
DDRFR  
DDRDIOR  
DDR Dual I/O Read (3-byte  
Address)  
DDRQIOR  
DDR Quad I/O Read (3-byte  
Address)  
ED  
PP  
QPP  
Page Program (3-byte Address)  
Quad Page Program (3-byte  
Address)  
02  
32  
SE  
Erase 256 kB (3-byte Address)  
D8  
3. For backward compatibility to the 3-byte addressing, the standard instructions can be used in conjunction  
with the Bank Address Register:  
a. The Bank Address Register is used to switch between 128-Mb (16-MB) banks of memory, The standard 3-byte  
address selects an address within the bank selected by the Bank Address Register.  
i. The host system writes the Bank Address Register to access beyond the first 128 Mb of memory.  
ii. This applies to read, erase, and program commands.  
b. The Bank Register provides the high order (4th) byte of address, which is used to address the available  
memory at addresses greater than 16 MB.  
c. Bank Register bits are volatile.  
i. On power up, the default is Bank0 (the lowest address 16 MB).  
d. For Read, the device will continuously transfer out data until the end of the array.  
i. There is no bank to bank delay.  
ii. The Bank Address Register is not updated.  
iii. The Bank Address Register value is used only for the initial address of an access.  
Table 40  
Bank address map  
Bank Address Register Bits  
Bank  
Memory Array Address Range (Hex)  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
00000000  
01000000  
02000000  
03000000  
00FFFFFF  
01FFFFFF  
02FFFFFF  
03FFFFFF  
Datasheet  
74 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
Table 41  
Function  
S25FL512S command set (sorted by function)  
Maximum  
frequency  
(MHz)  
Command  
name  
Instruction  
value (Hex)  
Command description  
Read Device  
Identification  
READ_ID  
(REMS)  
Read Electronic Manufacturer Signature  
90  
133  
RDID  
RES  
Read ID (JEDEC Manufacturer ID and JEDEC CFI)  
Read Electronic Signature  
Read Serial Flash Discoverable Parameters  
Read Status Register-1  
9F  
AB  
5A  
05  
07  
35  
01  
04  
06  
30  
18  
14  
133  
50  
RSFDP  
RDSR1  
RDSR2  
RDCR  
WRR  
WRDI  
WREN  
CLSR  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
Register  
Access  
Read Status Register-2  
Read Configuration Register-1  
Write Register (Status-1, Configuration-1)  
Write Disable  
Write Enable  
Clear Status Register-1 - Erase/Prog. Fail Reset  
ECC Read (4-byte address  
ECCRD  
ABRD  
AutoBoot Register Read  
133  
(QUAD=0)  
104  
(QUAD=1)  
Register  
Access  
ABWR  
BRRD  
BRWR  
BRAC  
AutoBoot Register Write  
Bank Register Read  
Bank Register Write  
Bank Register Access  
(Legacy Command formerly used for Deep Power  
Down)  
15  
16  
17  
B9  
133  
133  
133  
133  
DLPRD  
PNVDLR  
WVDLR  
Data Learning Pattern Read  
Program NV Data Learning Register  
Write Volatile Data Learning Register  
41  
43  
4A  
133  
133  
133  
Datasheet  
75 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
Table 41  
Function  
S25FL512S command set (sorted by function) (continued)  
Maximum  
frequency  
(MHz)  
Command  
name  
Instruction  
value (Hex)  
Command description  
Read Flash  
Array  
READ  
4READ  
Read (3- or 4-byte address)  
Read (4-byte address)  
03  
13  
0B  
0C  
0D  
0E  
3B  
3C  
6B  
6C  
BB  
BC  
BD  
BE  
EB  
EC  
ED  
EE  
02  
12  
32  
38  
50  
50  
133  
133  
80  
FAST_READ Fast Read (3- or 4-byte address)  
4FAST_READ Fast Read (4-byte address)  
DDRFR  
4DDRFR  
DOR  
4DOR  
QOR  
4QOR  
DIOR  
4DIOR  
DDR Fast Read (3- or 4-byte address)  
DDR Fast Read (4-byte address)  
Read Dual Out (3- or 4-byte address)  
Read Dual Out (4-byte address)  
Read Quad Out (3- or 4-byte address)  
Read Quad Out (4-byte address)  
Dual I/O Read (3- or 4-byte address)  
Dual I/O Read (4-byte address)  
80  
104  
104  
104  
104  
104  
104  
80  
DDRDIOR DDR Dual I/O Read (3- or 4-byte address)  
4DDRDIOR DDR Dual I/O Read (4-byte address)  
QIOR  
4QIOR  
DDRQIOR DDR Quad I/O Read (3- or 4-byte address)  
4DDRQIOR DDR Quad I/O Read (4-byte address)  
80  
Quad I/O Read (3- or 4-byte address)  
Quad I/O Read (4-byte address)  
104  
104  
80  
80  
Program Flash  
Array  
PP  
Page Program (3- or 4-byte address)  
Page Program (4-byte address)  
Quad Page Program (3- or 4-byte address)  
Quad Page Program - Alternate instruction (3- or  
4-byte address)  
133  
133  
80  
4PP  
QPP  
QPP  
80  
4QPP  
PGSP  
PGRS  
BE  
BE  
SE  
Quad Page Program (4-byte address)  
Program Suspend  
Program Resume  
34  
85  
8A  
60  
C7  
D8  
DC  
75  
7A  
42  
4B  
80  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
Erase Flash  
Array  
Bulk Erase  
Bulk Erase (alternate command)  
Erase 256 kB (3- or 4-byte address)  
Erase 256 kB (4-byte address)  
Erase Suspend  
Erase Resume  
OTP Program  
4SE  
ERSP  
ERRS  
OTPP  
OTPR  
One Time  
Program Array  
OTP Read  
Datasheet  
76 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
Table 41  
Function  
S25FL512S command set (sorted by function) (continued)  
Maximum  
frequency  
(MHz)  
Command  
name  
Instruction  
value (Hex)  
Command description  
Advanced  
Sector  
DYBRD  
DYBWR  
PPBRD  
PPBP  
PPBE  
ASPRD  
ASPP  
PLBRD  
PLBWR  
PASSRD  
PASSP  
PASSU  
RESET  
MBR  
DYB Read  
DYB Write  
PPB Read  
PPB Program  
PPB Erase  
ASP Read  
ASP Program  
PPB Lock Bit Read  
PPB Lock Bit Write  
Password Read  
Password Program  
Password Unlock  
Software Reset  
Mode Bit Reset  
Reserved for Multi-I/O-High Perf Mode (MPM)  
E0  
E1  
E2  
E3  
E4  
2B  
2F  
A7  
A6  
E7  
E8  
E9  
F0  
FF  
A3  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
Protection  
Reset  
Reserved for  
Future Use  
MPM  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
Reserved-18 Reserved  
Reserved-E5 Reserved  
Reserved-E6 Reserved  
18  
E5  
E6  
9.1.2  
Read device identification  
There are multiple commands to read information about the device manufacturer, device type, and device  
features. SPI memories from different vendors have used different commands and formats for reading infor-  
mation about the memories. The S25FL512S device supports the three most common device information  
commands.  
9.1.3  
Register read or write  
There are multiple registers for reporting embedded operation status or controlling device configuration  
options. There are commands for reading or writing these registers. Registers contain both volatile and  
non-volatile bits. Non-volatile bits in registers are automatically erased and programmed as a single (write)  
operation.  
9.1.3.1  
Monitoring operation status  
The host system can determine when a write, program, erase, suspend or other embedded operation is complete  
by monitoring the Write in Progress (WIP) bit in the Status Register. The Read from Status Register-1 command  
provides the state of the WIP bit. The program error (P_ERR) and erase error (E_ERR) bits in the status register  
indicate whether the most recent program or erase command has not completed successfully. When P_ERR or  
E_ERR bits are set to one, the WIP bit will remain set to one indicating the device remains busy. Under this  
condition, only the CLSR, WRDI, RDSR1, RDSR2, and software RESET commands are valid commands. A Clear  
Status Register (CLSR) followed by a Write Disable (WRDI) command must be sent to return the device to standby  
state. CLSR clears the WIP, P_ERR, and E_ERR bits. WRDI clears the WEL bit. Alternatively, Hardware Reset, or  
Software Reset (RESET) may be used to return the device to standby state.  
Datasheet  
77 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
9.1.3.2  
Configuration  
There are commands to read, write, and protect registers that control interface path width, interface timing,  
interface address length, and some aspects of data protection.  
9.1.4  
Read flash array  
Data may be read from the memory starting at any byte boundary. Data bytes are sequentially read from incre-  
mentally higher byte addresses until the host ends the data transfer by driving CS# input High. If the byte address  
reaches the maximum address of the memory array, the read will continue at address zero of the array.  
There are several different read commands to specify different access latency and data path widths. Double Data  
Rate (DDR) commands also define the address and data bit relationship to both SCK edges:  
• The Read command provides a single address bit per SCK rising edge on the SI signal with read data returning  
a single bit per SCK falling edge on the SO signal. This command has zero latency between the address and the  
returning data but is limited to a maximum SCK rate of 50 MHz.  
• Other read commands have a latency period between the address and returning data but can operate at higher  
SCK frequencies. The latency depends on the configuration register latency code.  
• The Fast Read command provides a single address bit per SCK rising edge on the SI signal with read data  
returning a single bit per SCK falling edge on the SO signal and may operate up to 133 MHz.  
• Dual or Quad Output read commands provide address a single bit per SCK rising edge on the SI / I/O0 signal  
with read data returning two bits, or four bits of data per SCK falling edge on the I/O0-I/O3 signals.  
• Dual or Quad I/O Read commands provide address two bits or four bits per SCK rising edge with read data  
returning two bits, or four bits of data per SCK falling edge on the I/O0-I/O3 signals.  
• Fast (Single), Dual, or Quad Double Data Rate read commands provide address one bit, two bits or four bits per  
every SCK edge with read data returning one bit, two bits, or four bits of data per every SCK edge on the I/O0-I/O3  
signals. Double Data Rate (DDR) operation is only supported for core and I/O voltages of 3 to 3.6V.  
9.1.5  
Program flash array  
Programming data requires two commands: Write Enable (WREN), and Page Program (PP or QPP). The Page  
Program command accepts from 1 byte up to 512 consecutive bytes of data (page) to be programmed in one  
operation. Programming means that bits can either be left at 1, or programmed from 1 to 0. Changing bits from  
0 to 1 requires an erase operation.  
9.1.6  
Erase flash array  
The Sector Erase (SE) and Bulk Erase (BE) commands set all the bits in a sector or the entire memory array to 1.  
A bit needs to be first erased to 1 before programming can change it to a 0. While bits can be individually  
programmed from a 1 to 0, erasing bits from 0 to 1 must be done on a sector-wide (SE) or array-wide (BE) level.  
9.1.7  
OTP, block protection, and advanced sector protection  
There are commands to read and program a separate One TIme Programmable (OTP) array for permanent data  
such as a serial number. There are commands to control a contiguous group (block) of flash memory array sectors  
that are protected from program and erase operations. There are commands to control which individual flash  
memory array sectors are protected from program and erase operations.  
9.1.8  
Reset  
There is a command to reset to the default conditions present after power on to the device. There is a command  
to reset (exit from) the Enhanced Performance Read Modes.  
Datasheet  
78 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
9.1.9  
Reserved  
Some instructions are reserved for future use. In this generation of the S25FL512S some of these command  
instructions may be unused and not affect device operation, some may have undefined results.  
Some commands are reserved to ensure that a legacy or alternate source device command is allowed without  
affect. This allows legacy software to issue some commands that are not relevant for the current generation  
S25FL512S device with the assurance these commands do not cause some unexpected action.  
Some commands are reserved for use in special versions of the FL-S not addressed by this document or for a  
future generation. This allows new host memory controller designs to plan the flexibility to issue these command  
instructions. The command format is defined if known at the time this document revision is published.  
9.2  
Identification commands  
9.2.1  
Read identification - REMS (Read_ID or REMS 90h)  
The READ_ID command identifies the Device Manufacturer ID and the Device ID. The command is also referred to  
as Read Electronic Manufacturer and device Signature (REMS). READ-ID (REMS) is only supported for backward  
compatibility and should not be used for new software designs. New software designs should instead make use  
of the RDID command.  
The command is initiated by shifting on SI the instruction code “90h” followed by a 24-bit address of 00000h.  
Following this, the Manufacturer ID and the Device ID are shifted out on SO starting at the falling edge of SCK after  
address. The Manufacturer ID and the Device ID are always shifted out with the MSb first. If the 24-bit address is  
set to 000001h, then the Device ID is read out first followed by the Manufacturer ID. The Manufacturer ID and  
Device ID output data toggles between address 000000H and 000001H until terminated by a low to high transition  
on CS# input. The maximum clock frequency for the READ_ID command is  
133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
Phase  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 23  
Instruction (90h)  
1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Manufacturer ID Device ID  
Address  
Figure 47  
Table 42  
READ_ID (90h) command sequence  
Read_ID values  
Device  
S25FL512S  
Manufacturer ID (hex)  
Device ID (hex)  
19  
01  
9.2.2  
Read identification (RDID 9Fh)  
The Read Identification (RDID) command provides read access to manufacturer identification, device identifi-  
cation, and Common Flash Interface (CFI) information. The manufacturer identification is assigned by JEDEC. The  
CFI structure is defined by JEDEC standard. The device identification and CFI values are assigned by Infineon.  
The JEDEC Common Flash Interface (CFI) specification defines a device information structure, which allows a  
vendor-specified software flash management program (driver) to be used for entire families of flash devices.  
Software support can then be device-independent, JEDEC manufacturer ID independent, forward and  
backward-compatible for the specified flash device families. System vendors can standardize their flash drivers  
Datasheet  
79 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
for long-term software compatibility by using the CFI values to configure a family driver from the CFI information  
of the device in use.  
Any RDID command issued while a program, erase, or write cycle is in progress is ignored and has no effect on  
execution of the program, erase, or write cycle that is in progress.  
The RDID instruction is shifted on SI. After the last bit of the RDID instruction is shifted into the device, a byte of  
manufacturer identification, two bytes of device identification, extended device identification, and CFI infor-  
mation will be shifted sequentially out on SO. As a whole this information is referred to as ID-CFI. See “ID-CFI  
address space” on page 53 for the detail description of the ID-CFI contents.  
Continued shifting of output beyond the end of the defined ID-CFI address space will provide undefined data. The  
RDID command sequence is terminated by driving CS# to the logic high state anytime during data output.  
The maximum clock frequency for the RDID command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Data 1  
Data N  
Figure 48  
Read identification (RDID 9Fh) command sequence  
9.2.3  
Read electronic signature (RES) (ABh)  
The RES command is used to read a single byte Electronic Signature from SO. RES is only supported for backward  
compatibility and should not be used for new software designs. New software designs should instead make use  
of the RDID command.  
The RES instruction is shifted in followed by three dummy bytes onto SI. After the last bit of the three dummy  
bytes are shifted into the device, a byte of Electronic Signature will be shifted out of SO. Each bit is shifted out by  
the falling edge of SCK. The maximum clock frequency for the RES command is 50 MHz.  
The Electronic Signature can be read repeatedly by applying multiples of eight clock cycles.  
The RES command sequence is terminated by driving CS# to the logic high state anytime during data output.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 23  
Instruction (ABh)  
1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Device ID  
Phase  
Dummy  
Figure 49  
Table 43  
Read electronic signature (RES ABh) command sequence  
RES values  
Device  
Device ID (hex)  
S25FL512S  
19  
Datasheet  
80 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
9.2.4  
Read serial flash discoverable parameters (RSFDP 5Ah)  
The command is initiated by shifting on SI the instruction code ‘5Ah, followed by a 24-bit address of 000000h,  
followed by eight dummy cycles. The SFDP bytes are then shifted out on SO starting at the falling edge of SCK  
after the eight dummy cycles. The SFDP bytes are always shifted out with the MSb first. If the 24-bit address is set  
to any other value, the selected location in the SFDP space is the starting point of the data read. This enables  
random access to any parameter in the SFDP space. The maximum clock frequency for the RSFDP command is  
133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
Phase  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 23  
1 0  
Address  
7 6 5 4  
3
2 1 0  
Instruction  
Dummy Cycles  
Data 1  
Figure 50  
RSFDP command sequence  
9.3  
Register access commands  
Read status register-1 (RDSR1 05h)  
9.3.1  
The Read Status Register-1 (RDSR1) command allows the Status Register-1 contents to be read from SO. The  
Status Register-1 contents may be read at any time, even while a program, erase, or write operation is in progress.  
It is possible to read the Status Register-1 continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The status is  
updated for each eight cycle read. The maximum clock frequency for the RDSR1 (05h) command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Instruction  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Status Updated Status  
Phase  
Figure 51  
Read status register-1 (RDSR1 05h) command sequence  
9.3.2  
Read status register-2 (RDSR2 07h)  
The Read Status Register (RDSR2) command allows the Status Register-2 contents to be read from SO. The Status  
Register-2 contents may be read at any time, even while a program, erase, or write operation is in progress. It is  
possible to read the Status Register-2 continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The status is  
updated for each eight cycle read. The maximum clock frequency for the RDSR2 command is 133 MHz.  
Datasheet  
81 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Instruction  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Status Updated Status  
Phase  
Figure 52  
Read status register-2 (RDSR2 07h) command sequence  
9.3.3  
Read configuration register (RDCR 35h)  
The Read Configuration Register (RDCR) command allows the Configuration Register contents to be read from  
SO. It is possible to read the Configuration Register continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The  
Configuration Register contents may be read at any time, even while a program, erase, or write operation is in  
progress.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Register Read  
Repeat Register Read  
Figure 53  
Read configuration register (RDCR 35h) command sequence  
9.3.4  
Bank register read (BRRD 16h)  
The Read the Bank Register (BRRD) command allows the Bank address Register contents to be read from SO. The  
instruction is first shifted in from SI. Then the 8-bit Bank Register is shifted out on SO. It is possible to read the  
Bank Register continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The maximum operating clock frequency  
for the BRRD command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Instruction  
Register Read  
Repeat Register Read  
Phase  
Figure 54  
Read bank register (BRRD 16h) command  
9.3.5  
Bank register write (BRWR 17h)  
The Bank Register Write (BRWR) command is used to write address bits above A23, into the Bank Address Register  
(BAR). The command is also used to write the Extended address control bit (EXTADD) that is also in BAR[7]. BAR  
provides the high order addresses needed by devices having more than 128 Mb (16 MB), when using 3-byte  
address commands without extended addressing enabled (BAR[7] EXTADD = 0). Because this command is part of  
Datasheet  
82 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
the addressing method and is not changing data in the flash memory, this command does not require the WREN  
command to precede it.  
The BRWR instruction is entered, followed by the data byte on SI. The Bank Register is one data byte in length.  
The BRWR command has no effect on the P_ERR, E_ERR or WIP bits of the Status and Configuration Registers.  
Any bank address bit reserved for the future should always be written as a 0.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Input Data  
Figure 55  
Bank register write (BRWR 17h) command  
9.3.6  
Bank register access (BRAC B9h)  
The Bank Register Read and Write commands provide full access to the Bank Address Register (BAR) but they are  
both commands that are not present in legacy SPI memory devices. Host system SPI memory controller inter-  
faces may not be able to easily support such new commands. The Bank Register Access (BRAC) command uses  
the same command code and format as the Deep Power Down (DPD) command that is available in legacy SPI  
memories. The FL-S family does not support a DPD feature but assigns this legacy command code to the BRAC  
command to enable write access to the Bank Address Register for legacy systems that are able to send the legacy  
DPD (B9h) command.  
When the BRAC command is sent, the FL-S family device will then interpret an immediately following Write  
Register (WRR) command as a write to the lower address bits of the BAR. A WREN command is not used between  
the BRAC and WRR commands. Only the lower two bits of the first data byte following the WRR command code  
are used to load BAR[1:0]. The upper bits of that byte and the content of the optional WRR command second data  
byte are ignored. Following the WRR command the access to BAR is closed and the device interface returns to the  
standby state. The combined BRAC followed by WRR command sequence has no affect on the value of the ExtAdd  
bit (BAR[7]).  
Commands other than WRR may immediately follow BRAC and execute normally. However, any command other  
than WRR, or any other sequence in which CS# goes low and returns high, following a BRAC command, will close  
the access to BAR and return to the normal interpretation of a WRR command as a write to Status Register-1 and  
the Configuration Register.  
The BRAC + WRR sequence is allowed only when the device is in standby, program suspend, or erase suspend  
states. This command sequence is illegal when the device is performing an embedded algorithm or when the  
program (P_ERR) or erase (E_ERR) status bits are set to 1.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 56  
BRAC (B9h) command sequence  
9.3.7  
Write registers (WRR 01h)  
The Write Registers (WRR) command allows new values to be written to both the Status Register-1 and Configu-  
ration Register. Before the Write Registers (WRR) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN)  
Datasheet  
83 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
command must be received. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded successfully, the device  
will set the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
The Write Registers (WRR) command is entered by shifting the instruction and the data bytes on SI. The Status  
Register is one data byte in length.  
The Write Registers (WRR) command will set the P_ERR or E_ERR bits if there is a failure in the WRR operation.  
Any Status or Configuration Register bit reserved for the future must be written as a 0.  
CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the eighth or sixteenth bit of data has been latched. If not, the  
Write Registers (WRR) command is not executed. If CS# is driven high after the eighth cycle then only the Status  
Register-1 is written; otherwise, after the sixteenth cycle both the Status and Configuration Registers are written.  
When the configuration register QUAD bit CR[1] is 1, only the WRR command format with 16 data bits may be used.  
As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed Write Registers (WRR) operation is initiated. While  
the Write Registers (WRR) operation is in progress, the Status Register may still be read to check the value of the  
Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is a 1 during the self-timed Write Registers (WRR)  
operation, and is a 0 when it is completed. When the Write Registers (WRR) operation is completed, the Write  
Enable Latch (WEL) is set to a 0. The WRR command must be executed under continuous power. The maximum  
clock frequency for the WRR command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Input Status Register-1  
Figure 57  
Write registers (WRR 01h) command sequence – 8 data bits  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Instruction  
Input Status Register-1  
Input Configuration Register  
Phase  
Figure 58  
Write registers (WRR 01h) command sequence – 16 data bits  
The Write Registers (WRR) command allows the user to change the values of the Block Protect (BP2, BP1, and  
BP0) bits to define the size of the area that is to be treated as read-only. The Write Registers (WRR) command also  
allows the user to set the Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) bit to a 1 or a 0. The Status Register Write Disable  
(SRWD) bit and Write Protect (WP#) signal allow the BP bits to be hardware protected.  
When the Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) bit of the Status Register is a 0 (its initial delivery state), it is  
possible to write to the Status Register provided that the Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit has previously been set by  
a Write Enable (WREN) command, regardless of the whether Write Protect (WP#) signal is driven to the logic high  
or logic low state.  
When the Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) bit of the Status Register is set to a 1, two cases need to be  
considered, depending on the state of Write Protect (WP#):  
Datasheet  
84 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
• If Write Protect (WP#) signal is driven to the logic high state, it is possible to write to the Status and Configuration  
Registers provided that the Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit has previously been set to a “1” by initiating a Write  
Enable (WREN) command.  
• If Write Protect (WP#) signal is driven to the logic low state, it is not possible to write to the Status and Config-  
uration Registers even if the Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit has previously been set to a 1 by a Write Enable (WREN)  
command. Attempts to write to the Status and Configuration Registers are rejected, and are not accepted for  
execution. As a consequence, all the data bytes in the memory area that are protected by the Block Protect  
(BP2, BP1, BP0) bits of the Status Register, are also hardware protected by WP#.  
The WP# hardware protection can be provided:  
• by setting the Status Register Write Disable (SRWD) bit after driving Write Protect (WP#) signal to the logic low  
state;  
• or by driving Write Protect (WP#) signal to the logic low state after setting the Status Register Write Disable  
(SRWD) bit to a 1.  
The only way to release the hardware protection is to pull the Write Protect (WP#) signal to the logic high state.  
If WP# is permanently tied high, hardware protection of the BP bits can never be activated.  
Table 44  
Block protection modes  
Memory content  
SRWD  
WP#  
Mode  
Write protection of registers  
Unprotected  
Bit  
Protected area  
area  
1
1
0
1
0
0
Status and Configuration Registers are Protected  
Writable (if WREN command has set the against Page  
Ready to accept  
Page Program,  
Software WEL bit). The values in the SRWD, BP2, Program, Quad Quad Input  
Protected BP1, and BP0 bits and those in the  
Input Program, Program and  
Configuration Register can be changed SectorErase, and Sector Erase  
Bulk Erase  
commands  
0
1
Status and Configuration Registers are Protected  
Hardware Write Protected. The values in against Page  
Ready to accept  
Page Program or  
Hardware  
Protected  
the SRWD, BP2, BP1, and BP0 bits and  
those in the Configuration Register  
cannot be changed  
Program, Sector Erase commands  
Erase, and Bulk  
Erase  
The WRR command has an alternate function of loading the Bank Address Register if the command immediately  
follows a BRAC command. See “Bank register access (BRAC B9h)” on page 83.  
Notes  
45.The Status Register originally shows 00h when the device is first shipped from Infineon to the customer.  
46.Hardware protection is disabled when Quad Mode is enabled (QUAD bit = 1 in Configuration Register). WP#  
becomes I/O2; therefore, it cannot be utilized.  
Datasheet  
85 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
9.3.8  
Write enable (WREN 06h)  
The Write Enable (WREN) command sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit of the Status Register 1 (SR1[1]) to a 1.  
The Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit must be set to a 1 by issuing the Write Enable (WREN) command to enable write,  
program and erase commands.  
CS# must be driven into the logic high state after the eighth bit of the instruction byte has been latched in on SI.  
Without CS# being driven to the logic high state after the eighth bit of the instruction byte has been latched in on  
SI, the write enable operation will not be executed.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 59  
Write enable (WREN 06h) command sequence  
9.3.9  
Write disable (WRDI 04h)  
The Write Disable (WRDI) command sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit of the Status Register-1 (SR1[1]) to a 0.  
The Write Enable Latch (WEL) bit may be set to a 0 by issuing the Write Disable (WRDI) command to disable Page  
Program (PP), Sector Erase (SE), Bulk Erase (BE), Write Registers (WRR), OTP Program (OTPP), and other  
commands, that require WEL be set to 1 for execution. The WRDI command can be used by the user to protect  
memory areas against inadvertent writes that can possibly corrupt the contents of the memory. The WRDI  
command is ignored during an embedded operation while WIP bit =1.  
CS# must be driven into the logic high state after the eighth bit of the instruction byte has been latched in on SI.  
Without CS# being driven to the logic high state after the eighth bit of the instruction byte has been latched in on  
SI, the write disable operation will not be executed.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 60  
Write disable (WRDI 04h) command sequence  
9.3.10  
Clear status register (CLSR 30h):  
The Clear Status Register command resets bit SR1[5] (Erase Fail Flag) and bit SR1[6] (Program Fail Flag). It is not  
necessary to set the WEL bit before the Clear SR command is executed. The Clear SR command will be accepted  
even when the device remains busy with WIP set to 1, as the device does remain busy when either error bit is set.  
The WEL bit will be unchanged after this command is executed.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 61  
Clear status register (CLSR 30h) command sequence  
Datasheet  
86 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
9.3.11  
ECC status register read (ECCRD 18h)  
To read the ECC Status Register, the command is followed by the ECC unit (16 Bytes) address, the four least  
significant bits (LSb) of address must be set to zero. This is followed by the number of dummy cycles selected by  
the read latency value in CR2V[3:0]. Then the 8-bit contents of the ECC Register, for the ECC unit selected, are  
shifted out on SO 16 times, once for each byte in the ECC Unit. If CS# remains low the next ECC unit status is sent  
through SO/I/O1 16 times, once for each byte in the ECC Unit, this continues until CS# goes high. The maximum  
operating clock frequency for the ECC READ command is 133 MHz. See “Automatic ECC” on page 106 for details  
on ECC unit.  
CS#  
0
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55  
SCK  
32-Bit  
Instruction  
Dummy Byte  
Address  
SI  
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31 30 29  
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DATA OUT 1  
DATA OUT 2  
High Impedance  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
MSB  
MSB  
Figure 62  
ECC status register read command sequence  
9.3.12  
AutoBoot  
SPI devices normally require 32 or more cycles of command and address shifting to initiate a read command. And,  
in order to read boot code from an SPI device, the host memory controller or processor must supply the read  
command from a hardwired state machine or from some host processor internal ROM code.  
Parallel NOR devices need only an initial address, supplied in parallel in a single cycle, and initial access time to  
start reading boot code.  
The AutoBoot feature allows the host memory controller to take boot code from an S25FL512S device immedi-  
ately after the end of reset, without having to send a read command. This saves 32 or more cycles and simplifies  
the logic needed to initiate the reading of boot code.  
• As part of the power up reset, hardware reset, or command reset process the AutoBoot feature automatically  
starts a read access from a pre-specified address. At the time the reset process is completed, the device is ready  
to deliver code from the starting address. The host memory controller only needs to drive CS# signal from high  
to low and begin toggling the SCK signal. The S25FL512S device will delay code output for a pre-specified  
number of clock cycles before code streams out.  
- The Auto Boot Start Delay (ABSD) field of the AutoBoot register specifies the initial delay if any is needed by  
the host.  
- The host cannot send commands during this time.  
- If ABSD = 0, the maximum SCK frequency is 50 MHz.  
- If ABSD > 0, the maximum SCK frequency is 133 MHz if the QUAD bit CR1[1] is 0 or 104 MHz if the QUAD bit is  
set to 1.  
• The starting address of the boot code is selected by the value programmed into the AutoBoot Start Address  
(ABSA) field of the AutoBoot Register which specifies a 512 byte boundary aligned location; the default address  
is 00000000h.  
- Data will continuously shift out until CS# returns high.  
• At any point after the first data byte is transferred, when CS# returns high, the SPI device will reset to standard  
SPI mode; able to accept normal command operations.  
- A minimum of one byte must be transferred.  
- AutoBoot mode will not initiate again until another power cycle or a reset occurs.  
Datasheet  
87 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
• An AutoBoot Enable bit (ABE) is set to enable the AutoBoot feature.  
The AutoBoot register bits are non-volatile and provide:  
• The starting address (512-byte boundary), set by the AutoBoot Start Address (ABSA). The size of the ABSA field  
is 23 bits for devices up to 32-Gbit.  
• The number of initial delay cycles, set by the AutoBoot Start Delay (ABSD) 8-bit count value.  
• The AutoBoot Enable.  
If the configuration register QUAD bit CR1[1] is set to 1, the boot code will be provided 4 bits per cycle in the same  
manner as a Read Quad Out command. If the QUAD bit is 0 the code is delivered serially in the same manner as a  
Read command.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Wait States (ABSD
Data 1  
Data N  
Phase  
Figure 63  
AutoBoot sequence (CR1[1]=0)  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4  
5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5  
6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6  
7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7  
IO2  
IO3  
Phase  
Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5  
...  
Wait States (ABSD)  
Figure 64  
AutoBoot sequence (CR1[1]=1)  
9.3.13  
AutoBoot register read (ABRD 14h)  
The AutoBoot Register Read command is shifted into SI. Then the 32-bit AutoBoot Register is shifted out on SO,  
LSB first, most significant bit of each byte first. It is possible to read the AutoBoot Register continuously by  
providing multiples of 32 clock cycles. If the QUAD bit CR1[1] is cleared to 0, the maximum operating clock  
frequency for ABRD command is 133 MHz. If the QUAD bit CR1[1] is set to 1, the maximum operating clock  
frequency for ABRD command is 104 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Instruction  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Data1 DataN  
Phase  
Figure 65  
AutoBoot register read (ABRD 14h) command  
Datasheet  
88 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
9.3.14  
AutoBoot register write (ABWR 15h)  
Before the ABWR command can be accepted, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and decoded by  
the device, which sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
The ABWR command is entered by shifting the instruction and the data bytes on SI, LSB first, most significant bit  
of each byte first. The ABWR data is 32 bits in length.  
The ABWR command has status reported in Status Register-1 as both an erase and a programming operation. An  
E_ERR or a P_ERR may be set depending on whether the erase or programming phase of updating the register  
fails.  
CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the 32nd bit of data has been latched. If not, the ABWR command  
is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed ABWR operation is initiated. While  
the ABWR operation is in progress, Status Register-1 may be read to check the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP)  
bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is a 1 during the self-timed ABWR operation, and is a 0. when it is completed.  
When the ABWR cycle is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is set to a 0. The maximum clock frequency for  
the ABWR command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
SO  
Phase  
Instruction  
Input Data 1  
Figure 66  
AutoBoot register write (ABWR) command  
9.3.15  
Program NVDLR (PNVDLR 43h)  
Before the Program NVDLR (PNVDLR) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command  
must be issued and decoded by the device. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded success-  
fully, the device will set the Write Enable Latch (WEL) to enable the PNVDLR operation.  
The PNVDLR command is entered by shifting the instruction and the data byte on SI.  
CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the eighth (8th) bit of data has been latched. If not, the PNVDLR  
command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed PNVDLR operation is  
initiated. While the PNVDLR operation is in progress, the Status Register may be read to check the value of the  
Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is a 1 during the self-timed PNVDLR cycle, and is a 0.  
when it is completed. The PNVDLR operation can report a program error in the P_ERR bit of the status register.  
When the PNVDLR operation is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is set to a 0 The maximum clock  
frequency for the PNVDLR command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO  
Phase  
Instruction  
Input Data  
Figure 67  
Program NVDLR (PNVDLR 43h) command sequence  
Datasheet  
89 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
9.3.16  
Write VDLR (WVDLR 4Ah)  
Before the Write VDLR (WVDLR) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must  
be issued and decoded by the device. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded successfully,  
the device will set the Write Enable Latch (WEL) to enable WVDLR operation.  
The WVDLR command is entered by shifting the instruction and the data byte on SI.  
CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the eighth (8th) bit of data has been latched. If not, the WVDLR  
command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the WVDLR operation is initiated with  
no delays. The maximum clock frequency for the PNVDLR command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Input Data  
Figure 68  
Write VDLR (WVDLR 4Ah) command sequence  
9.3.17  
Data learning pattern read (DLPRD 41h)  
The instruction is shifted on SI, then the 8-bit DLP is shifted out on SO. It is possible to read the DLP continuously  
by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The maximum operating clock frequency for the DLPRD command  
is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Data 1  
Data N  
Figure 69  
DLP read (DLPRD 41h) command sequence  
9.4  
Read memory array commands  
Read commands for the main flash array provide many options for prior generation SPI compatibility or  
enhanced performance SPI:  
• Some commands transfer address or data on each rising edge of SCK. These are called Single Data Rate  
commands (SDR).  
• Some SDR commands transfer address one bit per rising edge of SCK and return data 1, 2, or 4 bits of data per  
rising edge of SCK. These are called Read or Fast Read for 1-bit data; Dual Output Read for 2-bit data, and Quad  
Output for 4-bit data.  
• Some SDR commands transfer both address and data 2 or 4 bits per rising edge of SCK. These are called Dual  
I/O for 2 bit and Quad I/O for 4 bit.  
• Some commands transfer address and data on both the rising edge and falling edge of SCK. These are called  
Double Data Rate (DDR) commands.  
• There are DDR commands for 1, 2, or 4 bits of address or data per SCK edge. These are called Fast DDR for 1-bit,  
Dual I/O DDR for 2-bit, and Quad I/O DDR for 4-bit per edge transfer.  
Datasheet  
90 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
All of these commands begin with an instruction code that is transferred one bit per SCK rising edge. The  
instruction is followed by either a 3- or 4-byte address transferred at SDR or DDR. Commands transferring address  
or data 2 or 4 bits per clock edge are called Multiple I/O (MIO) commands. For FL-S devices at  
256 Mb or higher density, the traditional SPI 3-byte addresses are unable to directly address all locations in the  
memory array. These device have a bank address register that is used with 3-byte address commands to supply  
the high order address bits beyond the address from the host system. The default bank address is zero.  
Commands are provided to load and read the bank address register. These devices may also be configured to  
take a 4-byte address from the host system with the traditional 3-byte address commands. The 4-byte address  
mode for traditional commands is activated by setting the External Address (EXTADD) bit in the bank address  
register to 1.  
The Quad I/O commands provide a performance improvement option controlled by mode bits that are sent  
following the address bits. The mode bits indicate whether the command following the end of the current read  
will be another read of the same type, without an instruction at the beginning of the read. These mode bits give  
the option to eliminate the instruction cycles when doing a series of Quad I/O read accesses.  
A device ordering option provides an enhanced high performance option by adding a similar mode bit scheme  
to the DDR Fast Read, Dual I/O, and Dual I/O DDR commands, in addition to the Quad I/O command.  
Some commands require delay cycles following the address or mode bits to allow time to access the memory  
array. The delay cycles are traditionally called dummy cycles. The dummy cycles are ignored by the memory thus  
any data provided by the host during these cycles is “don’t care” and the host may also leave the SI signal at high  
impedance during the dummy cycles. When MIO commands are used the host must stop driving the I/O signals  
(outputs are high impedance) before the end of last dummy cycle. When DDR commands are used the host must  
not drive the I/O signals during any dummy cycle. The number of dummy cycles varies with the SCK frequency or  
performance option selected via the Configuration Register 1 (CR1) Latency Code (LC). Dummy cycles are  
measured from SCK falling edge to next SCK falling edge. SPI outputs are traditionally driven to a new value on  
the falling edge of each SCK. Zero dummy cycles means the returning data is driven by the memory on the same  
falling edge of SCK that the host stops driving address or mode bits.  
The DDR commands may optionally have an 8-edge Data Learning Pattern (DLP) driven by the memory, on all  
data outputs, in the dummy cycles immediately before the start of data. The DLP can help the host memory  
controller determine the phase shift from SCK to data edges so that the memory controller can capture data at  
the center of the data eye.  
When using SDR I/O commands at higher SCK frequencies (>50 MHz), an LC that provides 1 or more dummy cycles  
should be selected to allow additional time for the host to stop driving before the memory starts driving data, to  
minimize I/O driver conflict. When using DDR I/O commands with the DLP enabled, an LC that provides 5 or more  
dummy cycles should be selected to allow 1 cycle of additional time for the host to stop driving before the  
memory starts driving the 4 cycle DLP.  
Each read command ends when CS# is returned High at any point during data return. CS# must not be returned  
High during the mode or dummy cycles before data returns as this may cause mode bits to be captured incor-  
rectly; making it indeterminate as to whether the device remains in enhanced high performance read mode.  
9.4.1  
Read (Read 03h or 4READ 13h)  
The instruction  
• 03h (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or  
• 03h (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or  
• 13h is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)  
Then the memory contents, at the address given, are shifted out on SO. The maximum operating clock frequency  
for the READ command is 50 MHz.  
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the  
next higher address in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore  
be read out with one single read instruction and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached,  
Datasheet  
91 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h, allowing the read sequence to be continued  
indefinitely.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4 3  
2
1 0 A  
1 0  
7
6 5  
4
3 2  
1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Data 1  
Data N  
Figure 70  
Read command sequence (READ 03h or 13h)  
9.4.2  
Fast read (FAST_READ 0Bh or 4FAST_READ 0Ch)  
The instruction  
• 0Bh (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or  
• 0Bh (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or  
• 0Ch is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)  
The address is followed by zero or eight dummy cycles depending on the latency code set in the Configuration  
Register. The dummy cycles allow the device internal circuits additional time for accessing the initial address  
location. During the dummy cycles the data value on SO is “don’t care” and may be high impedance. Then the  
memory contents, at the address given, are shifted out on SO.  
The maximum operating clock frequency for FAST READ command is 133 MHz.  
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the  
next higher address in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore  
be read out with one single read instruction and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached,  
the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h, allowing the read sequence to be continued  
indefinitely.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
Phase  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 A  
1 0  
Address  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Data 1  
Instruction  
Dummy Cycles  
Figure 71  
Fast read (FAST_READ 0Bh or 0Ch) command sequence with read latency  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
Phase  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 A  
Instruction  
1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Data 1 Data N  
Address  
Figure 72  
Fast read command (FAST_READ 0Bh or 0Ch) sequence without read latency  
Datasheet  
92 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
9.4.3  
Dual output read (DOR 3Bh or 4DOR 3Ch)  
The instruction  
• 3Bh (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or  
• 3Bh (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or  
• 3Ch is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)  
Then the memory contents, at the address given, is shifted out two bits at a time through I/O0 (SI) and I/O1 (SO).  
Two bits are shifted out at the SCK frequency by the falling edge of the SCK signal.  
The maximum operating clock frequency for the Dual Output Read command is 104 MHz. For Dual Output Read  
commands, there are zero or eight dummy cycles required after the last address bit is shifted into SI before data  
begins shifting out of I/O0 and I/O1. This latency period (i.e., dummy cycles) allows the device’s internal circuitry  
enough time to read from the initial address. During the dummy cycles, the data value on SI is a “don’t care” and  
may be high impedance. The number of dummy cycles is determined by the frequency of SCK (refer to Table 23).  
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the  
next higher address in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore  
be read out with one single read instruction and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached,  
the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h, allowing the read sequence to be continued  
indefinitely.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
23 22 21  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Instruction  
0
6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0  
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1  
Phase  
Address 8 Dummy Cycles  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Figure 73  
Dual output read command sequence (3-byte address, 3Bh [ExtAdd=0], LC=10b)  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
31 30 29  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Instruction  
0
6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0  
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1  
Phase  
Address 8 Dummy Cycles Data1  
Data2  
Figure 74  
Dual output read command sequence (4-byte address, 3Ch or 3Bh [ExtAdd=1, LC=10b])  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
31 30 29  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Instruction  
0 6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0  
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1  
Phase  
Address Data1  
Data2  
Figure 75  
Dual output read command sequence (4-byte address, 3Ch or 3Bh [ExtAdd=1, LC=11b])  
Datasheet  
93 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
9.4.4  
Quad output read (QOR 6Bh or 4QOR 6Ch)  
The instruction  
• 6Bh (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or  
• 6Bh (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or  
• 6Ch is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)  
Then the memory contents, at the address given, is shifted out four bits at a time through I/O0-I/O3. Each nibble  
(4 bits) is shifted out at the SCK frequency by the falling edge of the SCK signal.  
The maximum operating clock frequency for Quad Output Read command is 104 MHz. For Quad Output Read  
Mode, there may be dummy cycles required after the last address bit is shifted into SI before data begins shifting  
out of I/O0-I/O3. This latency period (i.e., dummy cycles) allows the device’s internal circuitry enough time to set  
up for the initial address. During the dummy cycles, the data value on I/O0-I/O3 is a “don’t care” and may be high  
impedance. The number of dummy cycles is determined by the frequency of SCK (refer to Table 23).  
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the  
next higher address in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore  
be read out with one single read instruction and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached,  
the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h, allowing the read sequence to be continued  
indefinitely.  
The QUAD bit of Configuration Register must be set (CR Bit1=1) to enable the Quad mode capability.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 A 1 0  
4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4  
5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5  
6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 6  
7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5  
IO2  
IO3  
Phase  
Address  
Instruction  
Dummy  
Figure 76  
Quad output read (QOR 6Bh or 4QOR 6Ch) command sequence with read latency  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
IO2  
IO3  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
A
1
0
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Instruction  
Address  
Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5  
Phase  
...  
Figure 77  
Quad output read (QOR 6Bh or 4QOR 6Ch) command sequence without read latency  
9.4.5  
Dual I/O read (DIOR BBh or 4DIOR BCh)  
The instruction  
• BBh (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or  
• BBh (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or  
Datasheet  
94 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
• BCh is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)  
The Dual I/O Read commands improve throughput with two I/O signals — I/O0 (SI) and I/O1 (SO). It is similar to  
the Dual Output Read command but takes input of the address two bits per SCK rising edge. In some applications,  
the reduced address input time might allow for code execution in place (XIP) i.e. directly from the memory device.  
The maximum operating clock frequency for Dual I/O Read is 104 MHz.  
For the Dual I/O Read command, there is a latency required after the last address bits are shifted into SI and SO  
before data begins shifting out of I/O0 and I/O1. There are different ordering part numbers that select the latency  
code table used for this command, either the High Performance LC (HPLC) table or the Enhanced High Perfor-  
mance LC (EHPLC) table. The HPLC table does not provide cycles for mode bits so each Dual I/O Read command  
starts with the 8 bit instruction, followed by address, followed by a latency period.  
This latency period (dummy cycles) allows the device internal circuitry enough time to access data at the initial  
address. During the dummy cycles, the data value on SI and SO are “don’t care” and may be high impedance. The  
number of dummy cycles is determined by the frequency of SCK (Table 23). The number of dummy cycles is set  
by the LC bits in the Configuration Register (CR1).  
The EHPLC table does provide cycles for mode bits so a series of Dual I/O Read commands may eliminate the 8-bit  
instruction after the first Dual I/O Read command sends a mode bit pattern of Axh that indicates the following  
command will also be a Dual I/O Read command. The first Dual I/O Read command in a series starts with the 8-bit  
instruction, followed by address, followed by four cycles of mode bits, followed by a latency period. If the mode  
bit pattern is Axh the next command is assumed to be an additional Dual I/O Read command that does not  
provide instruction bits. That command starts with address, followed by mode bits, followed by latency.  
The Enhanced High Performance feature removes the need for the instruction sequence and greatly improves  
code execution (XIP). The upper nibble (bits 7-4) of the Mode bits control the length of the next Dual I/O Read  
command through the inclusion or exclusion of the first byte instruction code. The lower nibble (bits 3-0) of the  
Mode bits are “don’t care” (“x”) and may be high impedance. If the Mode bits equal Axh, then the device remains  
in Dual I/O Enhanced High Performance Read Mode and the next address can be entered (after CS# is raised high  
and then asserted low) without the BBh or BCh instruction, as shown in Figure 81; thus, eliminating eight cycles  
for the command sequence. The following sequences will release the device from Dual I/O Enhanced High Perfor-  
mance Read mode; after which, the device can accept standard SPI commands:  
1. During the Dual I/O Enhanced High Performance Command Sequence, if the Mode bits are any value other than  
Axh, then the next time CS# is raised high the device will be released from Dual I/O Read Enhanced High Per-  
formance Read mode.  
During any operation, if CS# toggles high to low to high for eight cycles (or less) and data input (I/O0 and I/O1) are  
not set for a valid instruction sequence, then the device will be released from Dual I/O Enhanced High Perfor-  
mance Read mode. Note that the four mode bit cycles are part of the device’s internal circuitry latency time to  
access the initial address after the last address cycle that is clocked into I/O0 (SI) and I/O1 (SO).  
It is important that the I/O signals be set to high-impedance at or before the falling edge of the first data out clock.  
At higher clock speeds the time available to turn off the host outputs before the memory device begins to drive  
(bus turn around) is diminished. It is allowed and may be helpful in preventing I/O signal contention, for the host  
system to turn off the I/O signal outputs (make them high impedance) during the last two “don’t care” mode  
cycles or during any dummy cycles.  
Following the latency period the memory content, at the address given, is shifted out two bits at a time through  
I/O0 (SI) and I/O1 (SO). Two bits are shifted out at the SCK frequency at the falling edge of SCK signal.  
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the  
next higher address in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore  
be read out with one single read instruction and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached,  
the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h, allowing the read sequence to be continued  
indefinitely.  
CS# should not be driven high during mode or dummy bits as this may make the mode bits indeterminate.  
Datasheet  
95 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
22 20 18  
23 21 19  
Address  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
0
1
6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0  
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1  
Phase  
4 Dummy  
Instruction  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Figure 78  
Dual I/O read command sequence (3-byte address, BBh [ExtAdd=0], HPLC=00b)  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
30 28 26  
31 29 27  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Instruction  
0
1
6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0  
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1  
Phase  
Address  
6 Dummy  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Figure 79  
Dual I/O read command sequence (4-byte address, BBh [ExtAdd=1], HPLC=10b)  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 30  
31  
2 0 6 4 2  
3 1 7 5 3  
Mode  
0
1
6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0  
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1  
Instruction  
Address  
Dum  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Phase  
Figure 80  
Dual I/O read command sequence (4-byte address, BCh or BBh [ExtAdd=1], EHPLC=10b)  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
30  
31  
2
3
0
1
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Data N  
Address  
Mode  
Dum  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Phase  
Figure 81  
Continuous dual I/O read command sequence (4-byte address, BCh or BBh [ExtAdd=1], EH-  
PLC=10b)  
Datasheet  
96 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
9.4.6  
Quad I/O read (QIOR EBh or 4QIOR ECh)  
The instruction  
• EBh (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or  
• EBh (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or  
• ECh is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)  
The Quad I/O Read command improves throughput with four I/O signals — I/O0-I/O3. It is similar to the Quad  
Output Read command but allows input of the address bits four bits per serial SCK clock. In some applications,  
the reduced instruction overhead might allow for code execution (XIP) directly from the S25FL512S device. The  
QUAD bit of the Configuration Register must be set (CR Bit1=1) to enable the Quad capability of the S25FL512S  
device.  
The maximum operating clock frequency for Quad I/O Read is 104 MHz.  
For the Quad I/O Read command, there is a latency required after the mode bits (described below) before data  
begins shifting out of I/O0-I/O3. This latency period (i.e., dummy cycles) allows the device’s internal circuitry  
enough time to access data at the initial address. During latency cycles, the data value on I/O0-I/O3 are “don’t  
care” and may be high impedance. The number of dummy cycles is determined by the frequency of SCK and the  
latency code table (refer to Table 23). There are different ordering part numbers that select the latency code  
table used for this command, either the High Performance LC (HPLC) table or the Enhanced High Performance  
LC (EHPLC) table. The number of dummy cycles is set by the LC bits in the Configuration Register (CR1). However,  
both latency code tables use the same latency values for the Quad I/O Read command.  
Following the latency period, the memory contents at the address given, is shifted out four bits at a time through  
I/O0-I/O3. Each nibble (4 bits) is shifted out at the SCK frequency by the falling edge of the SCK signal.  
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the  
next higher address in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore  
be read out with one single read instruction and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached,  
the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h, allowing the read sequence to be continued  
indefinitely.  
Address jumps can be done without the need for additional Quad I/O Read instructions. This is controlled through  
the setting of the Mode bits (after the address sequence, as shown in Figure 84 or Figure 85). This added feature  
removes the need for the instruction sequence and greatly improves code execution (XIP). The upper nibble (bits  
7-4) of the Mode bits control the length of the next Quad I/O instruction through the inclusion or exclusion of the  
first byte instruction code. The lower nibble (bits 3-0) of the Mode bits are “don’t care” (“x”). If the Mode bits equal  
Axh, then the device remains in Quad I/O High Performance Read Mode and the next address can be entered (after  
CS# is raised high and then asserted low) without requiring the EBh or ECh instruction, as shown in Figure 83 or  
Figure 85; thus, eliminating eight cycles for the command sequence. The following sequences will release the  
device from Quad I/O High Performance Read mode; after which, the device can accept standard SPI commands:  
1. During the Quad I/O Read Command Sequence, if the Mode bits are any value other than Axh, then the next  
time CS# is raised high the device will be released from Quad I/O High Performance Read mode.  
During any operation, if CS# toggles high to low to high for eight cycles (or less) and data input (I/O0-I/O3) are not  
set for a valid instruction sequence, then the device will be released from Quad I/O High Performance Read mode.  
Note that the two mode bit clock cycles and additional wait states (i.e., dummy cycles) allow the device’s internal  
circuitry latency time to access the initial address after the last address cycle that is clocked into I/O0-I/O3.  
It is important that the I/O0-I/O3 signals be set to high-impedance at or before the falling edge of the first data  
out clock. At higher clock speeds the time available to turn off the host outputs before the memory device begins  
to drive (bus turn around) is diminished. It is allowed and may be helpful in preventing I/O0-I/O3 signal  
contention, for the host system to turn off the I/O0-I/O3 signal outputs (make them high impedance) during the  
last “don’t care” mode cycle or during any dummy cycles.  
CS# should not be driven high during mode or dummy bits as this may make the mode bits indeterminate.  
Datasheet  
97 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
IO2  
IO3  
Phase  
7
6 5  
4
3
2
1 0 20  
4
5
6
7
0 4  
1 5  
2 6  
3 7  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4 0  
5 1  
6 2  
7 3  
D2  
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4 0  
5 1  
6 2  
7 3  
D4  
21  
22  
23  
Instruction  
Address  
Mode  
Dummy  
D1  
D3  
Figure 82  
Quad I/O read command sequence (3-byte address, EBh [ExtAdd=0], LC=00b)  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
IO2  
IO3  
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
20  
21  
22  
23  
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
1
1
6
7
7
7
4
5
5
5
2
3
3
3
0
1
1
1
7
DN-1  
D N  
Address  
Mode  
Dummy  
D1  
D 2  
D 3  
D 4  
Phase  
Figure 83  
Continuous quad I/O read command sequence (3-byte address), LC=00b  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
IO2  
IO3  
Phase  
7
6 5  
4
3
2
1 0 28  
4
5
6
0 4  
1 5  
2 6  
3 7  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4 0  
5 1  
6 2  
7 3  
D 2  
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4 0  
5 1  
6 2  
7 3  
D 4  
29  
30  
31  
7
Instruction  
Address  
Mode  
Dummy  
D 1  
D 3  
Figure 84  
Quad I/O read command sequence(4-byte address, ECh or EBh [ExtAdd=1], LC=00b)  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
IO2  
IO3  
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
28  
29  
30  
31  
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
1
1
6
7
7
7
4
5
5
5
2
3
3
3
0
1
1
1
7
DN-1  
D N  
Address  
Mode  
Dummy  
D 1  
D 2  
D 3  
D 4  
Phase  
Figure 85  
Continuous quad I/O read command sequence (4-byte address), LC=00b  
Datasheet  
98 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
9.4.7  
DDR fast read (DDRFR 0Dh, 4DDRFR 0Eh)  
The instruction  
• 0Dh (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or  
• 0Dh (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or  
• 0Eh is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)  
The DDR Fast Read command improves throughput by transferring address and data on both the falling and  
rising edge of SCK. It is similar to the Fast Read command but allows transfer of address and data on every edge  
of the clock.  
The maximum operating clock frequency for DDR Fast Read command is 80 MHz.  
For the DDR Fast Read command, there is a latency required after the last address bits are shifted into SI before  
data begins shifting out of SO. There are different ordering part numbers that select the latency code table used  
for this command, either the High Performance LC (HPLC) table or the Enhanced High Performance LC (EHPLC)  
table. The HPLC table does not provide cycles for mode bits so each DDR Fast Read command starts with the 8-bit  
instruction, followed by address, followed by a latency period.  
This latency period (dummy cycles) allows the device internal circuitry enough time to access data at the initial  
address. During the dummy cycles, the data value on SI is “don’t care” and may be high impedance. The number  
of dummy cycles is determined by the frequency of SCK (see Table 23). The number of dummy cycles is set by  
the LC bits in the Configuration Register (CR1).  
Then the memory contents, at the address given, is shifted out, in DDR fashion, one bit at a time on each clock  
edge through SO. Each bit is shifted out at the SCK frequency by the rising and falling edge of the SCK signal.  
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the  
next higher address in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore  
be read out with one single read instruction and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached,  
the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h, allowing the read sequence to be continued  
indefinitely.  
The EHPLC table does provide cycles for mode bits so a series of DDR Fast Read commands may eliminate the  
8-bit instruction after the first DDR Fast Read command sends a mode bit pattern of complementary first and  
second Nibbles, e.g. A5h, 5Ah, 0Fh, etc., that indicates the following command will also be a DDR Fast Read  
command. The first DDR Fast Read command in a series starts with the 8-bit instruction, followed by address,  
followed by four cycles of mode bits, followed by a latency period. If the mode bit pattern is complementary the  
next command is assumed to be an additional DDR Fast Read command that does not provide instruction bits.  
That command starts with address, followed by mode bits, followed by latency.  
When the EHPLC table is used, address jumps can be done without the need for additional DDR Fast Read instruc-  
tions. This is controlled through the setting of the Mode bits (after the address sequence, as shown in Figure 89  
and Figure 88. This added feature removes the need for the eight bit SDR instruction sequence to reduce initial  
access time (improves XIP performance). The Mode bits control the length of the next DDR Fast Read operation  
through the inclusion or exclusion of the first byte instruction code. If the upper nibble (I/O[7:4]) and lower nibble  
(I/O[3:0]) of the Mode bits are complementary (i.e. 5h and Ah) then the next address can be entered (after CS# is  
raised high and then asserted low) without requiring the 0Dh or 0Eh instruction, as shown in Figure and  
Figure 89, thus, eliminating eight cycles from the command sequence. The following sequences will release the  
device from this continuous DDR Fast Read mode; after which, the device can accept standard SPI commands:  
1. During the DDR Fast Read Command Sequence, if the Mode bits are not complementary the next time CS# is  
raised high the device will be released from the continuous DDR Fast Read mode.  
2. During any operation, if CS# toggles high to low to high for eight cycles (or less) and data input (SI) are not set  
for a valid instruction sequence, then the device will be released from DDR Fast Read mode.  
CS# should not be driven high during mode or dummy bits as this may make the mode bits indeterminate.  
The HOLD function is not valid during any part of a Fast DDR Command.  
Although the data learning pattern (DLP) is programmable, the following example shows example of the DLP of  
34h. The DLP 34h (or 00110100) will be driven on each of the active outputs (i.e. all four I/Os on a x4 device, both  
I/Os on a x2 device and the single SO output on a x1 device). This pattern was chosen to cover both DC and AC  
data transition scenarios. The two DC transition scenarios include data low for a long period of time (two half  
Datasheet  
99 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
clocks) followed by a high going transition (001) and the complementary low going transition (110). The two AC  
transition scenarios include data low for a short period of time (one half clock) followed by a high going transition  
(101) and the complementary low going transition (010). The DC transitions will typically occur with a starting  
point closer to the supply rail than the AC transitions that may not have fully settled to their steady state (DC)  
levels. In many cases the DC transitions will bound the beginning of the data valid period and the AC transitions  
will bound the ending of the data valid period. These transitions will allow the host controller to identify the  
beginning and ending of the valid data eye. Once the data eye has been characterized the optimal data capture  
point can be chosen. See “SPI DDR data learning registers” on page 64 for more details.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2322  
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
7
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Mode  
Dummy  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Figure 86  
DDR fast read initial access (3-byte address, 0Dh [ExtAdd=0, EHPLC=11b])  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
23  
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IO1  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
Phase  
Address  
Mode  
Dum  
Data 1  
D2  
Figure 87  
Continuous DDR fast read subsequent access (3-byte address [ExtAdd=0, EHPLC=11b])  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
31  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
SO  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6  
DLP Data 1 D2  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Mode  
Figure 88  
DDR fast read initial access (4-byte address, 0Eh or 0Dh [ExtAdd=1], EHPLC=01b)[47]  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
31  
1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6  
DLP Data 1 D2  
Address  
Mode  
Phase  
Figure 89  
Note  
Continuous DDR fast read subsequent access (4-byte address [ExtAdd=1], EHPLC=01b)[47]  
47.Example DLP of 34h (or 00110100).  
Datasheet  
100 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
3.  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6  
Data 1 D2  
Adress  
Instruction  
Dummy  
Phase  
Figure 90  
DDR fast read subsequent access (4-byte address, HPLC=01b)  
9.4.8  
DDR dual I/O read (BDh, BEh)  
The instruction  
• BDh (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or  
• BDh (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or  
• BEh is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)  
Then the memory contents, at the address given, is shifted out, in a DDR fashion, two bits at a time on each clock  
edge through I/O0 (SI) and I/O1 (SO). Two bits are shifted out at the SCK frequency by the rising and falling edge  
of the SCK signal.  
The DDR Dual I/O Read command improves throughput with two I/O signals — I/O0 (SI) and I/O1 (SO). It is similar  
to the Dual I/O Read command but transfers two address, mode, or data bits on every edge of the clock. In some  
applications, the reduced instruction overhead might allow for code execution (XIP) directly from the S25FL512S  
device.  
The maximum operating clock frequency for DDR Dual I/O Read command is 80 MHz.  
For DDR Dual I/O Read commands, there is a latency required after the last address bits are shifted into I/O0 and  
I/O1, before data begins shifting out of I/O0 and I/O1. There are different ordering part numbers that select the  
latency code table used for this command, either the High Performance LC (HPLC) table or the Enhanced High  
Performance LC (EHPLC) table. The number of latency (dummy) clocks is determined by the frequency of SCK  
(refer to Table 22 or Table 24). The number of dummy cycles is set by the LC bits in the Configuration Register  
(CR1).  
The HPLC table does not provide cycles for mode bits so each Dual I/O command starts with the 8 bit instruction,  
followed by address, followed by a latency period. This latency period allows the device’s internal circuitry  
enough time to access the initial address. During these latency cycles, the data value on SI (I/O0) and SO (I/O1)  
are “don’t care” and may be high impedance. When the Data Learning Pattern (DLP) is enabled the host system  
must not drive the I/O signals during the dummy cycles. The I/O signals must be left high impedance by the host  
so that the memory device can drive the DLP during the dummy cycles.  
The EHPLC table does provide cycles for mode bits so a series of Dual I/O DDR commands may eliminate the 8 bit  
instruction after the first command sends a complementary mode bit pattern, as shown in Figure 91 and  
Figure 93. This added feature removes the need for the eight bit SDR instruction sequence and dramatically  
reduces initial access times (improves XIP performance). The Mode bits control the length of the next DDR Dual  
I/O Read operation through the inclusion or exclusion of the first byte instruction code. If the upper nibble  
(I/O[7:4]) and lower nibble (I/O[3:0]) of the Mode bits are complementary (i.e. 5h and Ah) the device transitions  
to Continuous DDR Dual I/O Read Mode and the next address can be entered (after CS# is raised high and then  
asserted low) without requiring the BDh or BEh instruction, as shown in Figure 92, and thus, eliminating eight  
cycles from the command sequence. The following sequences will release the device from Continuous DDR Dual  
I/O Read mode; after which, the device can accept standard SPI commands:  
1. During the DDR Dual I/O Read Command Sequence, if the Mode bits are not complementary the next time CS#  
is raised high and then asserted low the device will be released from DDR Dual I/O Read mode.  
Datasheet  
101 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
2. During any operation, if CS# toggles high to low to high for eight cycles (or less) and data input (I/O0 and I/O1)  
are not set for a valid instruction sequence, then the device will be released from DDR Dual I/O Read mode.  
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the  
next higher address in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore  
be read out with one single read instruction and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached,  
the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h, allowing the read sequence to be continued  
indefinitely.  
CS# should not be driven high during mode or dummy bits as this may make the mode bits indeterminate. The  
HOLD function is not valid during Dual I/O DDR commands.  
Note that the memory devices may drive the I/Os with a preamble prior to the first data value. The preamble is a  
data learning pattern (DLP) that is used by the host controller to optimize data capture at higher frequencies. The  
preamble DLP drives the I/O bus for the four clock cycles immediately before data is output. The host must be  
sure to stop driving the I/O bus prior to the time that the memory starts outputting the preamble.  
The preamble is intended to give the host controller an indication about the round trip time from when the host  
drives a clock edge to when the corresponding data value returns from the memory device. The host controller  
will skew the data capture point during the preamble period to optimize timing margins and then use the same  
skew time to capture the data during the rest of the read operation. The optimized capture point will be deter-  
mined during the preamble period of every read operation. This optimization strategy is intended to compensate  
for both the PVT (process, voltage, temperature) of both the memory device and the host controller as well as  
any system level delays caused by flight time on the PCB.  
Datasheet  
102 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
Although the data learning pattern (DLP) is programmable, the following example shows example of the DLP of  
34h. The DLP 34h (or 00110100) will be driven on each of the active outputs (i.e. all four SIOs on a x4 device, both  
SIOs on a x2 device and the single SO output on a x1 device). This pattern was chosen to cover both DC and AC  
data transition scenarios. The two DC transition scenarios include data low for a long period of time (two half  
clocks) followed by a high going transition (001) and the complementary low going transition (110). The two AC  
transition scenarios include data low for a short period of time (one half clock) followed by a high going transition  
(101) and the complementary low going transition (010). The DC transitions will typically occur with a starting  
point closer to the supply rail than the AC transitions that may not have fully settled to their steady state (DC)  
levels. In many cases the DC transitions will bound the beginning of the data valid period and the AC transitions  
will bound the ending of the data valid period. These transitions will allow the host controller to identify the  
beginning and ending of the valid data eye. Once the data eye has been characterized the optimal data capture  
point can be chosen. See “SPI DDR data learning registers” on page 64 for more details.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
30 28  
31 29  
0
1
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
7 6 5 4  
7 6 5 4  
3
3
2
2
1 0  
1 0  
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
6
7
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Mode  
Dum  
DLP  
Data 1  
Figure 91  
DDR dual I/O read initial access (4-byte address, BEh or BDh [ExtAdd=1], EHPLC= 01b)  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
Phase  
30  
31  
2
3
0
1
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
7
7
6
6
4
4
5
5
DLP  
3
3
2 1  
2 1  
0
0
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
6
7
Dummy  
Address  
Mode  
Data 1  
D2  
Figure 92  
Continuous DDR dual I/O read subsequent access (4-byte address, EHPLC= 01b)  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
30  
31  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2 0  
3 1  
6 4 2 0 6  
7 5 3 1 7  
Data 1 D2  
Instruction  
Address  
Dummy  
Phase  
Figure 93  
DDR dual I/O read (4-byte address, BEh or BDh [ExtAdd=1], HPLC=00b)  
9.4.9  
DDR quad I/O read (EDh, EEh)  
The Read DDR Quad I/O command improves throughput with four I/O signals - I/O0-I/O3. It is similar to the Quad  
I/O Read command but allows input of the address four bits on every edge of the clock. In some applications, the  
reduced instruction overhead might allow for code execution (XIP) directly from the S25FL512S device. The QUAD  
bit of the Configuration Register must be set (CR Bit1=1) to enable the Quad capability.  
The instruction  
• EDh (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or  
• EDh (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or  
• EEh is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)  
Datasheet  
103 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
The address is followed by mode bits. Then the memory contents, at the address given, is shifted out, in a DDR  
fashion, with four bits at a time on each clock edge through I/O0-I/O3.  
The maximum operating clock frequency for Read DDR Quad I/O command is 80 MHz.  
For Read DDR Quad I/O, there is a latency required after the last address and mode bits are shifted into the  
I/O0-I/O3 signals before data begins shifting out of I/O0-I/O3. This latency period (dummy cycles) allows the  
device’s internal circuitry enough time to access the initial address. During these latency cycles, the data value  
on I/O0-I/O3 are “don’t care” and may be high impedance. When the Data Learning Pattern (DLP) is enabled the  
host system must not drive the I/O signals during the dummy cycles. The I/O signals must be left high impedance  
by the host so that the memory device can drive the DLP during the dummy cycles.  
There are different ordering part numbers that select the latency code table used for this command, either the  
High Performance LC (HPLC) table or the Enhanced High Performance LC (EHPLC) table. The number of dummy  
cycles is determined by the frequency of SCK (refer to Table 22). The number of dummy cycles is set by the LC  
bits in the Configuration Register (CR1).  
Both latency tables provide cycles for mode bits so a series of Quad I/O DDR commands may eliminate the 8 bit  
instruction after the first command sends a complementary mode bit pattern, as shown in Figure 94 and  
Figure 96. This feature removes the need for the eight bit SDR instruction sequence and dramatically reduces  
initial access times (improves XIP performance). The Mode bits control the length of the next Read DDR Quad I/O  
operation through the inclusion or exclusion of the first byte instruction code. If the upper nibble (I/O[7:4]) and  
lower nibble (I/O[3:0]) of the Mode bits are complementary (i.e. 5h and Ah) the device transitions to Continuous  
Read DDR Quad I/O Mode and the next address can be entered (after CS# is raised high and then asserted low)  
without requiring the EDh or EEh instruction, as shown in Figure 95 and Figure 97 thus, eliminating eight cycles  
from the command sequence. The following sequences will release the device from Continuous Read DDR Quad  
I/O mode; after which, the device can accept standard SPI commands:  
1. During the Read DDR Quad I/O Command Sequence, if the Mode bits are not complementary the next time CS#  
is raised high and then asserted low the device will be released from Read DDR Quad I/O mode.  
2. During any operation, if CS# toggles high to low to high for eight cycles (or less) and data input (I/O0, I/O1, I/O2,  
and I/O3) are not set for a valid instruction sequence, then the device will be released from Read DDR Quad I/O  
mode.  
The address can start at any byte location of the memory array. The address is automatically incremented to the  
next higher address in sequential order after each byte of data is shifted out. The entire memory can therefore  
be read out with one single read instruction and address 000000h provided. When the highest address is reached,  
the address counter will wrap around and roll back to 000000h, allowing the read sequence to be continued  
indefinitely.  
CS# should not be driven high during mode or dummy bits as this may make the mode bits indeterminate. The  
HOLD function is not valid during Quad I/O DDR commands.  
Note that the memory devices drive the I/Os with a preamble prior to the first data value. The preamble is a  
pattern that is used by the host controller to optimize data capture at higher frequencies. The preamble drives  
the I/O bus for the four clock cycles immediately before data is output. The host must be sure to stop driving the  
I/O bus prior to the time that the memory starts outputting the preamble.  
The preamble is intended to give the host controller an indication about the round trip time from when the host  
drives a clock edge to when the corresponding data value returns from the memory device. The host controller  
will skew the data capture point during the preamble period to optimize timing margins and then use the same  
skew time to capture the data during the rest of the read operation. The optimized capture point will be deter-  
mined during the preamble period of every read operation. This optimization strategy is intended to compensate  
for both the PVT (process, voltage, temperature) of both the memory device and the host controller as well as  
any system level delays caused by flight time on the PCB.  
Datasheet  
104 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
Although the data learning pattern (DLP) is programmable, the following example shows example of the DLP of  
34h. The DLP 34h (or 00110100) will be driven on each of the active outputs (i.e. all four SIOs on a x4 device, both  
SIOs on a x2 device and the single SO output on a x1 device). This pattern was chosen to cover both DC and AC  
data transition scenarios. The two DC transition scenarios include data low for a long period of time (two half  
clocks) followed by a high going transition (001) and the complementary low going transition (110). The two AC  
transition scenarios include data low for a short period of time (one half clock) followed by a high going transition  
(101) and the complementary low going transition (010). The DC transitions will typically occur with a starting  
point closer to the supply rail than the AC transitions that may not have fully settled to their steady state (DC)  
levels. In many cases the DC transitions will bound the beginning of the data valid period and the AC transitions  
will bound the ending of the data valid period. These transitions will allow the host controller to identify the  
beginning and ending of the valid data eye. Once the data eye has been characterized the optimal data capture  
point can be chosen. See “SPI DDR data learning registers” on page 64 for more details.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
20 16 12 8  
21 17 13 9  
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
IO2  
22 18 14 10 6  
23 19 15 11 7  
Address  
IO3  
Phase  
Instruction  
Mode  
Dummy  
DLP  
D1  
D2  
Figure 94  
DDR quad I/O read initial access (3-byte address, EDh [ExtAdd=0], HPLC=11b)  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
IO2  
20 16 12  
21 17 13  
8
9
4
5
6
0
1
2
4
5
6
0
1
2
4
5
6
0
1
2
4
5
6
0
1
2
4
5
6
0
1
2
4
5
6
0
1
2
4
5
6
0
1
2
22 18 14 10  
Figure 95  
Continuous DDR quad I/O read subsequent access (3-byte address, HPLC=11b)  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
IO2  
IO3  
2. 2. 2. 1. 1.  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8 4 0 4 0  
9 5 1 5 1  
6 2 6 2  
7 3 7 3  
Mod.  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 4 0 4 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 1 5 1  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 2 6 2  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 3 7 3  
2. 2. 2. 1. 1.  
3. 2. 2. 1. 1. 1.  
3. 2. 2. 1. 1. 1.  
Address  
Instruction  
Dummy  
DLP  
D1 D2  
Phase  
Figure 96  
DDR quad I/O read initial access (4-byte address, EEh or EDh [ExtAdd=1], EHPLC=01b)[48]  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
IO2  
IO3  
28 24 20 16 12 8 4 0 4 0  
29 25 21 17 13 9 5 1 5 1  
30 26 22 18 14 10 6 2 6 2  
31 27 23 19 15 11 7 3 7 3  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 4 0 4 0 4  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 1 5 1 5  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 2 6 2 6  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 3 7 3 7  
Address  
Mode  
Dummy  
DLP  
D1  
D2  
Phase  
Figure 97  
Note  
Continuous DDR quad I/O read subsequent access (4-byte address, EHPLC=01b)[48]  
48.Example DLP of 34h (or 00110100).  
Datasheet  
105 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
9.5  
Program flash array commands  
9.5.1  
Program granularity  
9.5.1.1  
Automatic ECC  
Each 16 byte aligned and 16 byte length Programming Block has an automatic Error Correction Code (ECC) value.  
The data block plus ECC form an ECC unit. In combination with Error Detection and Correction (EDC) logic the  
ECC is used to detect and correct any single bit error found during a read access. When data is first programmed  
within an ECC unit the ECC value is set for the entire ECC unit. If the same ECC unit is programmed more than once  
the ECC value is changed to disable the EDC function. A sector erase is needed to again enable Automatic ECC on  
that Programming Block. The 16 byte Program Block is the smallest program granularity on which Automatic ECC  
is enabled.  
These are automatic operations transparent to the user. The transparency of the Automatic ECC feature  
enhances data accuracy for typical programming operations which write data once to each ECC unit but, facili-  
tates software compatibility to previous generations of FL family of products by allowing for single byte  
programming and bit walking in which the same ECC unit is programmed more than once. When an ECC unit has  
Automatic ECC disabled, EDC is not done on data read from the ECC unit location.  
An ECC status register is provided for determining if ECC is enabled on an ECC unit and whether any errors have  
been detected and corrected in the ECC unit data or the ECC (See “ECC status register (ECCSR)” on page 62.)  
The ECC Status Register Read (ECCRD) command is used to read the ECC status on any ECC unit.  
Error Detection and Correction (EDC) is applied to all parts of the Flash address spaces other than registers. An  
Error Correction Code (ECC) is calculated for each group of bytes protected and the ECC is stored in a hidden area  
related to the group of bytes. The group of protected bytes and the related ECC are together called an ECC unit.  
ECC is calculated for each 16 byte aligned and length ECC unit.  
• Single Bit EDC is supported with 8 ECC bits per ECC unit, plus 1 bit for an ECC disable Flag.  
• Sector erase resets all ECC bits and ECC disable flags in a sector to the default state (enabled).  
• ECC is programmed as part of the standard Program commands operation.  
• ECC is disabled automatically if multiple programming operations are done on the same ECC unit.  
• Single byte programming or bit walking is allowed but disables ECC on the second program to the same 16-byte  
ECC unit.  
• The ECC disable flag is programmed when ECC is disabled.  
• To re-enable ECC for an ECC unit that has been disabled, the Sector that includes the ECC unit must be erased.  
• To ensure the best data integrity provided by EDC, each ECC unit should be programmed only once so that ECC  
is stored for that unit and not disabled.  
• The calculation, programming, and disabling of ECC is done automatically as part of a programming operation.  
The detection and correction, if needed, is done automatically as part of read operations. The host system sees  
only corrected data from a read operation.  
• ECC protects the OTP region - however a second program operation on the same ECC unit will disable ECC  
permanently on that ECC unit (OTP is one time programmable, hence an erase operation to re-enable the ECC  
enable/indicator bit is prohibited).  
9.5.1.2  
Page programming  
Page Programming is done by loading a Page Buffer with data to be programmed and issuing a programming  
command to move data from the buffer to the memory array. This sets an upper limit on the amount of data that  
can be programmed with a single programming command. Page Programming allows up to a page size (512  
bytes) to be programmed in one operation. The page is aligned on the page size address boundary. It is possible  
to program from one bit up to a page size in each Page programming operation. It is recommended that a  
multiple of 16 byte length and aligned Program Blocks be written. For the very best performance, programming  
Datasheet  
106 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
should be done in full pages of 512 bytes aligned on 512-byte boundaries with each Page being programmed only  
once.  
9.5.1.3  
Single byte programming  
Single Byte Programming allows full backward compatibility to the standard SPI Page Programming (PP)  
command by allowing a single byte to be programmed anywhere in the memory array. While single byte  
programming is supported, this will disable Automatic ECC on the 16 byte ECC unit where the byte is located.  
9.5.2  
Page program (PP 02h or 4PP 12h)  
The Page Program (PP) commands allows bytes to be programmed in the memory (changing bits from 1 to 0).  
Before the Page Program (PP) commands can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must  
be issued and decoded by the device. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded successfully,  
the device sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
The instruction  
• 02h (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or  
• 02h (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or  
• 12h is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)  
and at least one data byte on SI. Up to a page can be provided on SI after the 3-byte address with instruction 02h  
or 4-byte address with instruction 12h has been provided. If the 9 least significant address bits (A8-A0) are not all  
zero, all transmitted data that goes beyond the end of the current page are programmed from the start address  
of the same page (from the address whose 9 least significant bits (A8-A0) are all zero) i.e. the address wraps within  
the page aligned address boundaries. This is a result of only requiring the user to enter one single page address  
to cover the entire page boundary.  
If less than a page of data is sent to the device, these data bytes will be programmed in sequence, starting at the  
provided address within the page, without having any affect on the other bytes of the same page.  
For optimized timings, using the Page Program (PP) command to load the entire page size program buffer within  
the page boundary will save overall programming time versus loading less than a page size into the program  
buffer.  
The programming process is managed by the flash memory device internal control logic. After a programming  
command is issued, the programming operation status can be checked using the Read Status Register-1  
command. The WIP bit (SR1[0]) will indicate when the programming operation is completed. The P_ERR bit  
(SR1[6]) will indicate if an error occurs in the programming operation that prevents successful completion of  
programming.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 A  
Instruction  
5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Address Input Data 1 Input Data 2  
Phase  
Figure 98  
Page program (PP 02h or 4PP 12h) command sequence  
9.5.3  
Quad page program (QPP 32h or 38h, or 4QPP 34h)  
The Quad-input Page Program (QPP) command allows bytes to be programmed in the memory (changing bits  
from 1 to 0). The Quad-input Page Program (QPP) command allows up to a page size (512 bytes) of data to be  
loaded into the Page Buffer using four signals: I/O0-I/O3. QPP can improve performance for PROM Programmer  
and applications that have slower clock speeds (< 12 MHz) by loading 4 bits of data per clock cycle. Systems with  
faster clock speeds do not realize as much benefit for the QPP command since the inherent page program time  
Datasheet  
107 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
becomes greater than the time it takes to clock-in the data. The maximum frequency for the QPP command is 80  
MHz.  
To use Quad Page Program the Quad Enable Bit in the Configuration Register must be set (QUAD=1). A Write  
Enable command must be executed before the device will accept the QPP command (Status Register-1, WEL=1).  
The instruction  
• 32h (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or  
• 32h (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or  
• 38h (ExtAdd=0) is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0) or  
• 38h (ExtAdd=1) is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0) or  
• 34h is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)  
and at least one data byte, into the I/O signals. Data must be programmed at the previously erased (FFh) memory  
locations.  
Recommend the programming page is aligned on the page size address boundary. It is possible to program from  
one bit up to a page size in each Page programming operation. It is recommended that a multiple of 16 byte length  
and aligned Program Blocks be written. This insures that Automatic ECC is not disabled.  
All other functions of QPP are identical to Page Program. The QPP command sequence is shown in the figure  
below.  
CS#  
SCK  
IO0  
IO1  
IO2  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
A
1
0
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IO3  
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 ...  
Figure 99  
Quad 512-byte page program command sequence  
9.5.4  
Program suspend (PGSP 85h) and resume (PGRS 8Ah)  
The Program Suspend command allows the system to interrupt a programming operation and then read from  
any other non-erase-suspended sector or non-program-suspended-page. Program Suspend is valid only during  
a programming operation.  
Commands allowed after the Program Suspend command is issued:  
• Read Status Register 1 (RDSR1 05h)  
• Read Status Register 2 (RDSR2 07h)  
The Write in Progress (WIP) bit in Status Register 1 (SR1[0]) must be checked to know when the programming  
operation has stopped. The Program Suspend Status bit in the Status Register-2 (SR2[0]) can be used to  
determine if a programming operation has been suspended or was completed at the time WIP changes to 0. The  
time required for the suspend operation to complete is tPSL, see Table 46.  
See Table 44 for the commands allowed while programming is suspend.  
The Program Resume command 8Ah must be written to resume the programming operation after a Program  
Suspend. If the programming operation was completed during the suspend operation, a resume command is not  
needed and has no effect if issued. Program Resume commands will be ignored unless a Program operation is  
suspended.  
After a Program Resume command is issued, the WIP bit in the Status Register-1 will be set to a 1 and the  
programming operation will resume. Program operations may be interrupted as often as necessary e.g. a  
program suspend command could immediately follow a program resume command but, in order for a program  
Datasheet  
108 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
operation to progress to completion there must be some periods of time between resume and the next suspend  
command greater than or equal to tPRS. See Table 46.  
tPSL  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
Phase  
Phase  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Status  
Suspend Instruction  
Read Status Instruction  
Instr. During Suspend  
Repeat Status Read Until Suspended  
Figure 100  
Program suspend (PGSP 85h) command sequence  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 101  
10.55 Program resume (PGRS 8Ah) command sequence  
9.6  
Erase flash array commands  
9.6.1  
Sector erase (SE D8h or 4SE DCh)  
The Sector Erase (SE) command sets all bits in the addressed sector to 1 (all bytes are FFh). Before the Sector  
Erase (SE) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and  
decoded by the device, which sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write opera-  
tions.  
The instruction  
• D8h [ExtAdd=0] is followed by a 3-byte address (A23-A0), or  
• D8h [ExtAdd=1] is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0), or  
• DCh is followed by a 4-byte address (A31-A0)  
CS# must be driven into the logic high state after the twenty-fourth or thirty-second bit of address has been  
latched in on SI. This will initiate the erase cycle, which involves the pre-programming and erase of the chosen  
sector. If CS# is not driven high after the last bit of address, the sector erase operation will not be executed.  
As soon as CS# is driven into the logic high state, the internal erase cycle will be initiated. With the internal erase  
cycle in progress, the user can read the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit to check if the operation has been  
Datasheet  
109 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
completed. The WIP bit will indicate a 1 when the erase cycle is in progress and a0 when the erase cycle has been  
completed.  
A Sector Erase (SE) command applied to a sector that has been Write Protected through the Block Protection bits  
or ASP, will not be executed and will set the E_ERR status.  
ASP has a PPB and a DYB protection bit for each sector.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
A
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Figure 102  
Sector erase (SE D8h or 4SE DCh) command sequence  
9.6.2  
Bulk erase (BE 60h or C7h)  
The Bulk Erase (BE) command sets all bits to 1 (all bytes are FFh) inside the entire flash memory array. Before the  
BE command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and decoded by  
the device, which sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
CS# must be driven into the logic high state after the eighth bit of the instruction byte has been latched in on SI.  
This will initiate the erase cycle, which involves the pre-programming and erase of the entire flash memory array.  
If CS# is not driven high after the last bit of instruction, the BE operation will not be executed.  
As soon as CS# is driven into the logic high state, the erase cycle will be initiated. With the erase cycle in progress,  
the user can read the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit to determine when the operation has been  
completed. The WIP bit will indicate a 1 when the erase cycle is in progress and a 0 when the erase cycle has been  
completed.  
A BE command can be executed only when the Block Protection (BP2, BP1, BP0) bits are set to 0’s. If the BP bits  
are not zero, the BE command is not executed and E_ERR is not set. The BE command will skip any sectors  
protected by the DYB or PPB and the E_ERR status will not be set.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 103  
Bulk erase command sequence  
9.6.3  
Erase suspend and resume commands (ERSP 75h or ERRS 7Ah)  
The Erase Suspend command, allows the system to interrupt a sector erase operation and then read from or  
program data to, any other sector. Erase Suspend is valid only during a sector erase operation. The Erase Suspend  
command is ignored if written during the Bulk Erase operation.  
When the Erase Suspend command is written during the sector erase operation, the device requires a maximum  
of tESL (erase suspend latency) to suspend the erase operation and update the status bits. See Table 47.  
Commands allowed after the Erase Suspend command is issued:  
• Read Status Register 1 (RDSR1 05h)  
• Read Status Register 2 (RDSR2 07h)  
Datasheet  
110 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
The Write in Progress (WIP) bit in Status Register 1 (SR1[0]) must be checked to know when the erase operation  
has stopped. The Erase Suspend bit in Status Register-2 (SR2[1]) can be used to determine if an erase operation  
has been suspended or was completed at the time WIP changes to 0.  
If the erase operation was completed during the suspend operation, a resume command is not needed and has  
no effect if issued. Erase Resume commands will be ignored unless an Erase operation is suspended.  
See Table 44 for the commands allowed while erase is suspend.  
After the erase operation has been suspended, the sector enters the erase-suspend mode. The system can read  
data from or program data to the device. Reading at any address within an erase-suspended sector produces  
undetermined data.  
A WREN command is required before any command that will change non-volatile data, even during erase  
suspend.  
The WRR and PPB Erase commands are not allowed during Erase Suspend, it is therefore not possible to alter the  
Block Protection or PPB bits during Erase Suspend. If there are sectors that may need programming during Erase  
suspend, these sectors should be protected only by DYB bits that can be turned off during Erase Suspend.  
However, WRR is allowed immediately following the BRAC command; in this special case the WRR is interpreted  
as a write to the Bank Address Register, not a write to SR1 or CR1.  
If a program command is sent for a location within an erase suspended sector the program operation will fail with  
the P_ERR bit set.  
After an erase-suspended program operation is complete, the device returns to the erase-suspend mode. The  
system can determine the status of the program operation by reading the WIP bit in the Status Register, just as  
in the standard program operation.  
The Erase Resume command 7Ah must be written to resume the erase operation if an Erase is suspend. Erase  
Resume commands will be ignored unless an Erase is Suspend.  
After an Erase Resume command is sent, the WIP bit in the status register will be set to a 1 and the erase operation  
will continue. Further Resume commands are ignored.  
Erase operations may be interrupted as often as necessary e.g. an erase suspend command could immediately  
follow an erase resume command but, in order for an erase operation to progress to completion there must be  
some periods of time between resume and the next suspend command greater than or equal to tERS. See  
Table 47.  
tESL  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
Phase  
Phase  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Status  
Suspend Instruction  
Read Status Instruction  
Instr. During Suspend  
Repeat Status Read Until Suspended  
Figure 104  
Erase suspend (ERSP 75h) command sequence  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO  
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 105  
Erase resume (ERRS 7Ah) command sequence  
Datasheet  
111 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
Table 45  
Commands allowed during program or erase suspend  
Allowed Allowed  
Instruction  
code  
Instruction  
name  
during  
during  
Comment  
erase program  
suspend suspend  
(Hex)  
BRAC  
BRRD  
BRWR  
CLSR  
B9  
16  
17  
30  
E0  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Bank address register may need to be changed during a  
suspend to reach a sector for read or program.  
Bank address register may need to be changed during a  
suspend to reach a sector for read or program.  
Bank address register may need to be changed during a  
suspend to reach a sector for read or program.  
Clear status may be used if a program operation fails during  
erase suspend.  
DYBRD  
It may be necessary to remove and restore dynamic  
protection during erase suspend to allow programming  
during erase suspend.  
DYBWR  
E1  
X
It may be necessary to remove and restore dynamic  
protection during erase suspend to allow programming  
during erase suspend.  
ERRS  
DDRFR  
4DDRFR  
FAST_READ  
4FAST_READ  
MBR  
7A  
0D  
0E  
0B  
0C  
FF  
8A  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Required to resume from erase suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
May need to reset a read operation during suspend.  
PGRS  
Needed to resume a program operation. A program resume  
may also be used during nested program suspend within an  
erase suspend.  
PGSP  
PP  
4PP  
85  
02  
12  
E2  
X
X
X
X
Program suspend allowed during erase suspend.  
Required for array program during erase suspend.  
Required for array program during erase suspend.  
Allowed for checking persistent protection before  
attempting a program command during erase suspend.  
PPBRD  
QPP  
4QPP  
4READ  
RDCR  
DIOR  
4DIOR  
DOR  
4DOR  
DDRDIOR  
4DDRDIOR  
DDRQIOR  
DDRQIOR4  
32, 38  
34  
13  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Required for array program during erase suspend.  
Required for array program during erase suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
35  
BB  
BC  
3B  
3C  
BD  
BE  
ED  
EE  
Datasheet  
112 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
Table 45  
Commands allowed during program or erase suspend (continued)  
Allowed Allowed  
Instruction  
code  
Instruction  
name  
during  
during  
Comment  
erase program  
suspend suspend  
(Hex)  
QIOR  
4QIOR  
QOR  
4QOR  
RDSR1  
RDSR2  
EB  
EC  
6B  
6C  
05  
07  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
Needed to read WIP to determine end of suspend process.  
Needed to read suspend status to determine whether the  
operation is suspended or complete.  
READ  
RESET  
WREN  
WRR  
03  
F0  
06  
01  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
All array reads allowed in suspend.  
Reset allowed anytime.  
Required for program command within erase suspend.  
Bank register may need to be changed during a suspend to  
reach a sector needed for read or program. WRR is allowed  
when following BRAC.  
9.7  
One time program array commands  
OTP program (OTPP 42h)  
9.7.1  
The OTP Program command programs data in the One Time Program region, which is in a different address space  
from the main array data. The OTP region is 1024 bytes so, the address bits from A23 to A10 must be zero for this  
command. Refer to “OTP address space” on page 54 for details on the OTP region. The protocol of the OTP  
Program command is the same as the Page Program command. Before the OTP Program command can be  
accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and decoded by the device, which sets  
the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
To program the OTP array in bit granularity, the rest of the bits within a data byte can be set to 1.  
Each region in the OTP memory space can be programmed one or more times, provided that the region is not  
locked. Attempting to program zeros in a region that is locked will fail with the P_ERR bit in SR1 set to 1  
Programming ones, even in a protected area does not cause an error and does not set P_ERR. Subsequent OTP  
programming can be performed only on the un-programmed bits (that is, 1 data).  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 23  
Instruction  
5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Address Input Data 1 Input Data 2  
Phase  
Figure 106  
Page program (OTPP 42h) command sequence  
9.7.2  
OTP read (OTPR 4Bh)  
The OTP Read command reads data from the OTP region. The OTP region is 1024 bytes so, the address bits from  
A23 to A10 must be zero for this command. Refer to “OTP address space” on page 54 for details on the OTP  
region. The protocol of the OTP Read command is similar to the Fast Read command except that it will not wrap  
to the starting address after the OTP address is at its maximum; instead, the data beyond the maximum OTP  
Datasheet  
113 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
address will be undefined. Also, the OTP Read command is not affected by the latency code. The OTP read  
command always has one dummy byte of latency as shown below.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
Phase  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 23  
1 0  
Address  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Data 1  
Instruction  
Dummy Cycles  
Figure 107  
Read OTP (OTPR 4Bh) command sequence  
9.8  
Advanced sector protection commands  
ASP read (ASPRD 2Bh)  
9.8.1  
The ASP Read instruction 2Bh is shifted into SI by the rising edge of the SCK signal. Then the 16-bit ASP register  
contents is shifted out on the serial output SO, LSB first. Each bit is shifted out at the SCK frequency by the falling  
edge of the SCK signal. It is possible to read the ASP register continuously by providing multiples of 16 clock  
cycles. The maximum operating clock frequency for the ASP Read (ASPRD) command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Register Read  
Repeat Register Read  
Figure 108  
ASPRD command  
9.8.2  
ASP program (ASPP 2Fh)  
Before the ASP Program (ASPP) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must  
be issued. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded, the device will set the Write Enable Latch  
(WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
The ASPP command is entered by driving CS# to the logic low state, followed by the instruction and two data  
bytes on SI, LSB first. The ASP Register is two data bytes in length.  
The ASPP command affects the P_ERR and WIP bits of the Status and Configuration Registers in the same manner  
as any other programming operation.  
CS# input must be driven to the logic high state after the sixteenth bit of data has been latched in. If not, the ASPP  
command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed ASPP operation is  
initiated. While the ASPP operation is in progress, the Status Register may be read to check the value of the  
Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is a 1 during the self-timed ASPP operation, and is a 0  
when it is completed. When the ASPP operation is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is set to a 0.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Input ASPR Low Byte  
Input ASPR High Byte  
Figure 109  
ASPP (2Fh) command  
Datasheet  
114 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
9.8.3  
DYB read (DYBRD E0h)  
The instruction E0h is latched into SI by the rising edge of the SCK signal. Followed by the 32-bit address selecting  
location zero within the desired sector (note, the high order address bits not used by a particular density device  
must be zero). Then the 8-bit DYB access register contents are shifted out on the serial output SO. Each bit is  
shifted out at the SCK frequency by the falling edge of the SCK signal. It is possible to read the same DYB access  
register continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The address of the DYB register does not  
increment so this is not a means to read the entire DYB array. Each location must be read with a separate DYB  
Read command. The maximum operating clock frequency for READ command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
Phase  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 31  
Instruction  
1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Register Repeat Register  
Address  
Figure 110  
DYBRD command sequence  
9.8.4  
DYB write (DYBWR E1h)  
Before the DYB Write (DYBWR) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must  
be issued. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded, the device will set the Write Enable Latch  
(WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
The DYBWR command is entered by driving CS# to the logic low state, followed by the instruction, the 32-bit  
address selecting location zero within the desired sector (note, the high order address bits not used by a  
particular density device must be zero), then the data byte on SI. The DYB Access Register is one data byte in  
length.  
The DYBWR command affects the P_ERR and WIP bits of the Status and Configuration Registers in the same  
manner as any other programming operation. CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the eighth bit of  
data has been latched in. If not, the DYBWR command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high  
state, the self-timed DYBWR operation is initiated. While the DYBWR operation is in progress, the Status Register  
may be read to check the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is a 1 during the  
self-timed DYBWR operation, and is a 0 when it is completed. When the DYBWR operation is completed, the Write  
Enable Latch (WEL) is set to a 0.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 31  
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Input Data  
Figure 111  
DYBWR (E1h) command sequence  
9.8.5  
PPB read (PPBRD E2h)  
The instruction E2h is shifted into SI by the rising edges of the SCK signal, followed by the 32-bit address selecting  
location zero within the desired sector (note, the high order address bits not used by a particular density device  
must be zero) Then the 8-bit PPB access register contents are shifted out on SO.  
It is possible to read the same PPB access register continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The  
address of the PPB register does not increment so this is not a means to read the entire PPB array. Each location  
Datasheet  
115 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
must be read with a separate PPB Read command. The maximum operating clock frequency for the PPB Read  
command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
Phase  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 31  
Instruction  
1 0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Register Repeat Register  
Address  
Figure 112  
PPBRD (E2h) command sequence  
9.8.6  
PPB program (PPBP E3h)  
Before the PPB Program (PPBP) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must  
be issued. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been decoded, the device will set the Write Enable Latch  
(WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
The PPBP command is entered by driving CS# to the logic low state, followed by the instruction, followed by the  
32-bit address selecting location zero within the desired sector (note, the high order address bits not used by a  
particular density device must be zero).  
The PPBP command affects the P_ERR and WIP bits of the Status and Configuration Registers in the same manner  
as any other programming operation.  
CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the last bit of address has been latched in. If not, the PPBP  
command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed PPBP operation is  
initiated. While the PPBP operation is in progress, the Status Register may be read to check the value of the  
Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is a 1 during the self-timed PPBP operation, and is a 0  
when it is completed. When the PPBP operation is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is set to a 0.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31  
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Address  
Figure 113  
PPBP (E3h) command sequence  
9.8.7  
PPB erase (PPBE E4h)  
The PPB Erase (PPBE) command sets all PPB bits to 1. Before the PPB Erase command can be accepted by the  
device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and decoded by the device, which sets the Write Enable  
Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
The instruction E4h is shifted into SI by the rising edges of the SCK signal.  
CS# must be driven into the logic high state after the eighth bit of the instruction byte has been latched in on SI.  
This will initiate the beginning of internal erase cycle, which involves the pre-programming and erase of the entire  
Datasheet  
116 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
PPB memory array. Without CS# being driven to the logic high state after the eighth bit of the instruction, the PPB  
erase operation will not be executed.  
With the internal erase cycle in progress, the user can read the value of the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit to check if  
the operation has been completed. The WIP bit will indicate a 1 when the erase cycle is in progress and a 0 when  
the erase cycle has been completed. Erase suspend is not allowed during PPB Erase.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 114  
PPB erase (PPBE E4h) command sequence  
9.8.8  
PPB lock bit read (PLBRD A7h)  
The PPB Lock Bit Read (PLBRD) command allows the PPB Lock Register contents to be read out of SO. It is  
possible to read the PPB lock register continuously by providing multiples of eight clock cycles. The PPB Lock  
Register contents may only be read when the device is in standby state with no other operation in progress. It is  
recommended to check the Write-In Progress (WIP) bit of the Status Register before issuing a new command to  
the device.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Register Read  
Repeat Register Read  
Figure 115  
PPB lock register read command sequence  
9.8.9  
PPB lock bit write (PLBWR A6h)  
The PPB Lock Bit Write (PLBWR) command clears the PPB Lock Register to zero. Before the PLBWR command can  
be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN) command must be issued and decoded by the device, which  
sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) in the Status Register to enable any write operations.  
The PLBWR command is entered by driving CS# to the logic low state, followed by the instruction.  
CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the eighth bit of instruction has been latched in. If not, the PLBWR  
command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed PLBWR operation is  
initiated. While the PLBWR operation is in progress, the Status Register may still be read to check the value of the  
Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is a 1 during the self-timed PLBWR operation, and is a  
0 when it is completed. When the PLBWR operation is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is set to a 0. The  
maximum clock frequency for the PLBWR command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 116  
PPB lock bit write (PLBWR A6h) command sequence  
Datasheet  
117 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
9.8.10  
Password read (PASSRD E7h)  
The correct password value may be read only after it is programmed and before the Password Mode has been  
selected by programming the Password Protection Mode bit to 0 in the ASP Register (ASP[2]). After the Password  
Protection Mode is selected the PASSRD command is ignored.  
The PASSRD command is shifted into SI. Then the 64-bit Password is shifted out on the serial output SO, LSB first,  
most significant bit of each byte first. Each bit is shifted out at the SCK frequency by the falling edge of the SCK  
signal. It is possible to read the Password continuously by providing multiples of 64 clock cycles. The maximum  
operating clock frequency for the PASSRD command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Data 1  
Data N  
Figure 117  
Password read (PASSRD E7h) command sequence  
9.8.11  
Password program (PASSP E8h)  
Before the Password Program (PASSP) command can be accepted by the device, a Write Enable (WREN)  
command must be issued and decoded by the device. After the Write Enable (WREN) command has been  
decoded, the device sets the Write Enable Latch (WEL) to enable the PASSP operation.  
The password can only be programmed before the Password Mode is selected by programming the Password  
Protection Mode bit to 0 in the ASP Register (ASP[2]). After the Password Protection Mode is selected the PASSP  
command is ignored.  
The PASSP command is entered by driving CS# to the logic low state, followed by the instruction and the  
password data bytes on SI, LSB first, most significant bit of each byte first. The password is sixty-four (64) bits in  
length.  
CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the sixty-fourth (64th) bit of data has been latched. If not, the  
PASSP command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed PASSP operation  
is initiated. While the PASSP operation is in progress, the Status Register may be read to check the value of the  
Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is a 1 during the self-timed PASSP cycle, and is a 0 when  
it is completed. The PASSP command can report a program error in the P_ERR bit of the status register. When the  
PASSP operation is completed, the Write Enable Latch (WEL) is set to a 0. The maximum clock frequency for the  
PASSP command is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Input Password High Byte  
Phase  
Instruction  
Input Password Low Byte  
Figure 118  
Password program (PASSP E8h) command sequence  
9.8.12  
Password unlock (PASSU E9h)  
The PASSU command is entered by driving CS# to the logic low state, followed by the instruction and the  
password data bytes on SI, LSB first, most significant bit of each byte first. The password is sixty-four (64) bits in  
length.  
CS# must be driven to the logic high state after the sixty-fourth (64th) bit of data has been latched. If not, the  
PASSU command is not executed. As soon as CS# is driven to the logic high state, the self-timed PASSU operation  
Datasheet  
118 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
is initiated. While the PASSU operation is in progress, the Status Register may be read to check the value of the  
Write-In Progress (WIP) bit. The Write-In Progress (WIP) bit is a 1 during the self-timed PASSU cycle, and is a 0 when  
it is completed.  
If the PASSU command supplied password does not match the hidden password in the Password Register, an  
error is reported by setting the P_ERR bit to 1. The WIP bit of the status register also remains set to 1. It is necessary  
to use the CLSR command to clear the status register, the RESET command to software reset the device, or drive  
the RESET# input low to initiate a hardware reset, in order to return the P_ERR and WIP bits to 0. This returns the  
device to standby state, ready for new commands such as a retry of the PASSU command.  
If the password does match, the PPB Lock bit is set to 1. The maximum clock frequency for the PASSU command  
is 133 MHz.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Input Password High Byte  
Phase  
Instruction  
Input Password Low Byte  
Figure 119  
Password unlock (PASSU E9h) command sequence  
9.9  
Reset commands  
9.9.1  
Software reset command (RESET F0h)  
The Software Reset command (RESET) restores the device to its initial power up state, except for the volatile  
FREEZE bit in the Configuration register CR1[1] and the volatile PPB Lock bit in the PPB Lock Register. The Freeze  
bit and the PPB Lock bit will remain set at their last value prior to the software reset. To clear the FREEZE bit and  
set the PPB Lock bit to its protection mode selected power on state, a full power-on-reset sequence or hardware  
reset must be done. Note that the non-volatile bits in the configuration register, TBPROT, TBPARM, and BPNV,  
retain their previous state after a Software Reset. The Block Protection bits BP2, BP1, and BP0, in the status  
register will only be reset if they are configured as volatile via the BPNV bit in the Configuration Register (CR1[3])  
and FREEZE is cleared to zero . The software reset cannot be used to circumvent the FREEZE or PPB Lock bit  
protection mechanisms for the other security configuration bits. The reset command is executed when CS# is  
brought to high state and requires tRPH time to execute.  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 120  
Software reset (RESET F0h) command sequence  
9.9.2  
Mode bit reset (MBR FFh)  
The Mode Bit Reset (MBR) command can be used to return the device from continuous high performance read  
mode back to normal standby awaiting any new command. Because some device packages lack a hardware  
RESET# input and a device that is in a continuous high performance read mode may not recognize any normal  
SPI command, a system hardware reset or software reset command may not be recognized by the device. It is  
recommended to use the MBR command after a system reset when the RESET# signal is not available or, before  
sending a software reset, to ensure the device is released from continuous high performance read mode.  
The MBR command sends Ones on SI or I/O0 for 8 SCK cycles. I/O1 to I/O3 are “don’t care” during these cycles.  
Datasheet  
119 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Commands  
CS#  
SCK  
SI  
SO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Phase  
Instruction  
Figure 121  
Mode bit (MBR FFh) reset command sequence  
9.10  
Table 46  
Embedded algorithm performance tables  
Program and erase performance  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
Typ[49]  
560  
340  
520  
Max[50]  
2000  
750/1300[51]  
2600  
Unit  
ms  
µs  
tW  
tPP  
tSE  
WRR Write Time  
Page Programming (512 bytes)  
Sector Erase Time  
(256-kB logical sectors = 4 x 64 kB physical sectors)  
ms  
tBE  
Bulk Erase Time (S25FL512S)  
103  
460  
sec  
Table 47  
Program suspend AC parameters  
Typi-  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
Comments  
cal  
Program Suspend Latency (tPSL  
)
40  
µs  
The time from Program Suspend  
command until the WIP bit is 0  
Program Resume to next Program  
0.06  
100  
µs Minimum is the time needed to issue the  
next Program Suspend command but ≥  
typical periods are needed for Program  
to progress to completion  
Suspend (tPRS  
)
Table 48  
Erase suspend AC parameters  
Typi-  
cal  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
Comments  
Erase Suspend Latency (tESL  
)
45  
µs  
The time from Erase Suspend  
command until the WIP bit is 0  
Erase Resume to next Erase  
Suspend (tERS)  
0.06  
100  
µs  
Minimum is the time needed to issue  
the next Erase Suspend command but ≥  
typical periods are needed for the Erase  
to progress to completion  
Notes  
49.Typical program and erase times assume the following conditions: 25°C, VCC = 3.0V; 10,000 cycles; checker-  
board data pattern.  
50.Under worst case conditions of 90°C; 100,000 cycles max.  
51.Industrial temperature range / Industrial Plus temperature range.  
Datasheet  
120 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Data integrity  
10  
Data integrity  
10.1  
Table 49  
Erase endurance  
Erase endurance  
Parameter  
Minimum  
100K  
Unit  
PE cycle  
PE cycle  
Program/Erase cycles per main Flash array sectors  
Program/Erase cycles per PPB array or non-volatile register  
100K  
array[52]  
10.2  
Data retention  
Table 50  
Data retention  
Minimum  
time  
Parameter  
Test conditions  
1K Program/Erase Cycles  
Unit  
20  
20  
2
Years  
Years  
Years  
Data Retention Time 10K Program/Erase Cycles  
100K Program/Erase Cycles  
Contact Infineon Sales and FAE for further information on the data integrity.  
Note  
52.Each write command to a non-volatile register causes a PE cycle on the entire non-volatile register array. OTP  
bits and registers internally reside in a separate array that is not PE cycled.  
Datasheet  
121 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
11  
Software interface reference  
11.1  
Command summary  
Table 51  
S25FL512S instruction set (sorted by instruction)  
Maximum frequency  
(MHz)  
Instruction (Hex)  
Command name  
Command description  
01  
02  
WRR  
Write Register  
133  
(Status-1, Configuration-1)  
PP  
Page Program (3- or 4-byte  
address)  
133  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
0B  
READ  
WRDI  
Read (3- or 4-byte address)  
Write Disable  
50  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
RDSR1  
Read Status Register-1  
Write Enable  
WREN  
RDSR2  
Read Status Register-2  
FAST_READ  
Fast Read (3- or 4-byte  
address)  
0C  
0D  
4FAST_READ  
DDRFR  
Fast Read (4-byte address)  
133  
80  
DDR Fast Read (3- or 4-byte  
address)  
0E  
12  
4DDRFR  
4PP  
DDR Fast Read (4-byte  
address)  
80  
Page Program (4-byte  
address)  
133  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
2B  
2F  
30  
4READ  
ABRD  
ABWR  
BRRD  
BRWR  
ECCRD  
ASPRD  
ASPP  
Read (4-byte address)  
AutoBoot Register Read  
AutoBoot Register Write  
Bank Register Read  
Bank Register Write  
ECC Read  
50  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
ASP Read  
ASP Program  
CLSR  
Clear Status Register -  
Erase/Program Fail Reset  
32  
34  
35  
38  
3B  
QPP  
4QPP  
RDCR  
QPP  
Quad Page Program (3- or  
4-byte address)  
80  
80  
Quad Page Program (4-byte  
address)  
Read Configuration  
Register-1  
133  
80  
Quad Page Program (3- or  
4-byte address)  
DOR  
Read Dual Out (3- or 4-byte  
address)  
104  
Datasheet  
122 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 51  
S25FL512S instruction set (sorted by instruction) (continued)  
Maximum frequency  
(MHz)  
Instruction (Hex)  
Command name  
Command description  
3C  
4DOR  
Read Dual Out (4-byte  
address)  
104  
41  
42  
43  
DLPRD  
OTPP  
Data Learning Pattern Read  
OTP Program  
133  
133  
133  
PNVDLR  
Program NV Data Learning  
Register  
4A  
WVDLR  
Write Volatile Data  
Learning Register  
133  
4B  
5A  
OTPR  
OTP Read  
133  
133  
RSFDP  
Read Serial Flash Discov-  
erable Parameters  
60  
6B  
BE  
Bulk Erase  
133  
104  
QOR  
Read Quad Out (3- or 4-byte  
address)  
6C  
4QOR  
Read Quad Out (4-byte  
address)  
104  
75  
7A  
85  
8A  
90  
ERSP  
ERRS  
Erase Suspend  
Erase Resume  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
PGSP  
Program Suspend  
Program Resume  
PGRS  
READ_ID (REMS)  
Read Electronic Manufac-  
turer Signature  
9F  
A3  
RDID  
MPM  
Read ID (JEDEC Manufac-  
turer ID and JEDEC CFI)  
133  
133  
Reserved for Multi-I/O-High  
Perf Mode (MPM)  
A6  
A7  
AB  
B9  
PLBWR  
PLBRD  
RES  
PPB Lock Bit Write  
133  
133  
50  
PPB Lock Bit Read  
Read Electronic Signature  
BRAC  
Bank Register Access  
(Legacy Command  
formerly used for Deep  
Power Down)  
133  
BB  
BC  
BD  
BE  
C7  
DIOR  
4DIOR  
Dual I/O Read (3- or 4-byte  
address)  
104  
104  
80  
Dual I/O Read (4-byte  
address)  
DDRDIOR  
4DDRDIOR  
BE  
DDR Dual I/O Read (3- or  
4-byte address)  
DDR Dual I/O Read (4-byte  
address)  
80  
Bulk Erase (alternate  
command)  
133  
Datasheet  
123 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 51  
S25FL512S instruction set (sorted by instruction) (continued)  
Maximum frequency  
(MHz)  
Instruction (Hex)  
Command name  
Command description  
D8  
DC  
SE  
Erase 256 kB (3- or 4-byte  
address)  
133  
4SE  
Erase 256 kB (4-byte  
address)  
133  
E0  
E1  
E2  
E3  
E4  
E5  
E6  
E7  
E8  
E9  
EB  
DYBRD  
DYBWR  
PPBRD  
DYB Read  
133  
133  
133  
133  
133  
DYB Write  
PPB Read  
PPBP  
PPB Program  
PPB Erase  
PPBE  
Reserved-E5  
Reserved-E6  
PASSRD  
PASSP  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Password Read  
Password Program  
Password Unlock  
133  
133  
133  
104  
PASSU  
QIOR  
Quad I/O Read (3- or 4-byte  
address)  
EC  
ED  
EE  
4QIOR  
Quad I/O Read (4-byte  
address)  
104  
80  
DDRQIOR  
4DDRQIOR  
DDR Quad I/O Read (3- or  
4-byte address)  
DDR Quad I/O Read (4-byte  
address)  
80  
F0  
FF  
RESET  
MBR  
Software Reset  
Mode Bit Reset  
133  
133  
11.2  
Serial flash discoverable parameters (SFDP) address map  
The SFDP address space has a header starting at address zero that identifies the SFDP data structure and provides  
a pointer to each parameter. One Basic Flash parameter is mandated by the JEDEC JESD216B standard. Two  
optional parameter tables for Sector Map and 4 Byte Address Instructions follow the Basic Flash table. Infineon  
provides an additional parameter by pointing to the ID-CFI address space i.e. the ID-CFI address space is a sub-set  
of the SFDP address space. The parameter tables portion of the SFDP data structure are located within the ID-CFI  
address space and is thus both a CFI parameter and an SFDP parameter. In this way both SFDP and ID-CFI infor-  
mation can be accessed by either the RSFDP or RDID commands.  
Table 52  
SFDP overview map  
Byte address  
Description  
0000h  
,,,  
Location zero within JEDEC JESD216B SFDP space – start of SFDP header  
Remainder of SFDP header followed by undefined space  
Location zero within ID-CFI space – start of ID-CFI parameter tables  
ID-CFI parameters  
1000h  
...  
1120h  
...  
Start of SFDP parameter which is also one of the CFI parameter tables  
Remainder of SFDP parameter tables followed by either more CFI parameters or undefined  
space  
Datasheet  
124 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
11.2.1  
Table 53  
Field definitions  
SFDP header  
SFDP  
Relative  
byte ad-  
dress  
Dword ad-  
dress  
Data  
Description  
00h  
SFDP  
53h  
This is the entry point for Read SFDP (5Ah) command i.e. location zero  
within SFDP space ASCII “S”  
ASCII “F”  
ASCII “D”  
ASCII “P”  
Header 1st  
DWORD  
01h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
46h  
44h  
50h  
06h  
SFDP  
Header 2nd  
DWORD  
SFDP Minor Revision (06h = JEDEC JESD216 Revision B) This revision  
is backward compatible with all prior minor revisions. Minor revisions  
are changes that define previously reserved fields, add fields to the  
end, or that clarify definitions of existing fields. Increments of the  
minor revision value indicate that previously reserved parameter  
fields may have been assigned a new definition or entire Dwords may  
have been added to the parameter table. However, the definition of  
previously existing fields is unchanged and therefore remain  
backward compatible with earlier SFDP parameter table revisions.  
Software can safely ignore increments of the minor revision number,  
as long as only those parameters the software was designed to  
support are used i.e. previously reserved fields and additional Dwords  
must be masked or ignored . Do not do a simple compare on the minor  
revision number, looking only for a match with the revision number  
that the software is designed to handle. There is no problem with  
using a higher number minor revision.  
05h  
01h  
SFDP Major Revision This is the original major revision. This major  
revision is compatible with all SFDP reading and parsing software.  
06h  
07h  
08h  
09h  
05h  
FFh  
00h  
00h  
Number of Parameter Headers (zero based, 05h = 6 parameters)  
Unused  
Parameter ID LSb (00h = JEDEC SFDP Basic SPI Flash Parameter)  
Parameter Minor Revision (00h = JESD216) - This older revision  
parameter header is provided for any legacy SFDP reading and parsing  
software that requires seeing a minor revision 0 parameter header.  
SFDP software designed to handle later minor revisions should  
continue reading parameter headers looking for a higher numbered  
minor revision that contains additional parameters for that software  
revision.  
Parameter  
Header 0 1st  
DWORD  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
01h  
09h  
20h  
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision - all SFDP  
software is compatible with this major revision.  
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) 09h  
= 9 Dwords  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) JEDEC Basic  
SPI Flash parameter byte offset = 1120h  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1  
Parameter  
Header 0  
2nd DWORD  
0Dh  
0Eh  
0Fh  
11h  
00h  
FFh  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2  
Parameter ID MSb (FFh = JEDEC defined legacy Parameter ID)  
Datasheet  
125 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 53  
SFDP header (continued)  
SFDP  
Relative  
byte ad-  
dress  
Dword ad-  
dress  
Data  
Description  
10h  
11h  
Parameter  
Header 1 1st  
DWORD  
00h  
05h  
Parameter ID LSb (00h = JEDEC SFDP Basic SPI Flash Parameter)  
Parameter Minor Revision (05h = JESD216 Revision A) - This older  
revision parameter header is provided for any legacy SFDP reading  
and parsing software that requires seeing a minor revision 5  
parameter header. SFDP software designed to handle later minor  
revisions should continue reading parameter headers looking for a  
later minor revision that contains additional parameters.  
12h  
13h  
14h  
01h  
10h  
20h  
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision - all SFDP  
software is compatible with this major revision.  
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) 10h  
= 16 Dwords  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) JEDEC Basic  
SPI Flash parameter byte offset = 1120h address  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1  
Parameter  
Header 1  
2nd DWORD  
15h  
16h  
17h  
18h  
19h  
1Ah  
11h  
00h  
FFh  
00h  
06h  
01h  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2  
Parameter ID MSb (FFh = JEDEC defined Parameter)  
Parameter ID LSb (00h = JEDEC SFDP Basic SPI Flash Parameter)  
Parameter Minor Revision (06h = JESD216 Revision B)  
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision - all SFDP  
software is compatible with this major revision.  
Parameter  
Header 2 1st  
DWORD  
1Bh  
1Ch  
10h  
20h  
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) 10h  
= 16 Dwords  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) JEDEC Basic  
SPI Flash parameter byte offset = 1120h address  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2  
Parameter ID MSb (FFh = JEDEC defined Parameter)  
Parameter ID LSb (81h = SFDP Sector Map Parameter)  
Parameter Minor Revision (00h = Initial version as defined in JESD216  
Revision B)  
Parameter  
Header 2  
2nd DWORD  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
11h  
00h  
FFh  
81h  
00h  
Parameter  
Header 3 1st  
DWORD  
22h  
01h  
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision - all SFDP  
software that recognizes this parameter’s ID is compatible with this  
major revision.  
23h  
24h  
02h  
60h  
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) 02h  
= 2 Dwords  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) JEDEC  
parameter byte offset = 1160h  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2  
Parameter  
Header 3  
2nd DWORD  
25h  
26h  
27h  
11h  
00h  
FFh  
Parameter ID MSb (FFh = JEDEC defined Parameter)  
Datasheet  
126 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 53  
SFDP header (continued)  
SFDP  
Relative  
byte ad-  
dress  
Dword ad-  
dress  
Data  
Description  
28h  
29h  
Parameter  
Header 4 1st  
DWORD  
84h  
00h  
Parameter ID LSb (00h = SFDP 4 Byte Address Instructions Parameter)  
Parameter Minor Revision (00h = Initial version as defined in JESD216  
Revision B)  
2Ah  
01h  
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision - all SFDP  
software that recognizes this parameter’s ID is compatible with this  
major revision.  
2Bh  
2Ch  
02h  
68h  
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) (2h  
= 2 Dwords)  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) JEDEC  
parameter byte offset = 1168h  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2  
Parameter ID MSb (FFh = JEDEC defined Parameter)  
Parameter ID LSb (Spansion Vendor Specific ID-CFI parameter) Legacy  
Manufacturer ID 01h = AMD / Spansion  
Parameter Minor Revision (01h = ID-CFI updated with SFDP Rev B  
table)  
Parameter Major Revision (01h = The original major revision - all SFDP  
software that recognizes this parameter’s ID is compatible with this  
major revision.  
Parameter  
Header 4  
2nd DWORD  
2Dh  
2Eh  
2Fh  
30h  
11h  
00h  
FFh  
01h  
Parameter  
Header 5 1st  
DWORD  
31h  
32h  
01h  
01h  
33h  
5Ch  
Parameter Table Length (in double words = Dwords = 4 byte units) CFI  
starts at 1000h, the final SFDP parameter (CFI ID = A5) starts at 111Eh  
(SFDP starting point of 1120h -2hB of CFI parameter header), for a  
length of 11EhB excluding the CFI A5 parameter. The final CFI A5  
parameter adds an additional 52hB for a total of 11Eh + 82h = 170hB.  
170hB/4 = 5Ch Dwords.  
34h  
Parameter  
Header 5  
2nd DWORD  
00h  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 0 (Dword = 4 byte aligned) Entry point  
for ID-CFI parameter is byte offset = 1000h relative to SFDP location  
zero.  
35h  
36h  
37h  
10h  
00h  
01h  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 1  
Parameter Table Pointer Byte 2  
Parameter ID MSb (01h = JEDEC JEP106 Bank Number 1)  
Datasheet  
127 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
11.3  
Device ID and common flash interface (ID-CFI) address map  
11.3.1  
Field definitions  
Table 54  
Manufacturer and Device ID  
Byte address  
Data  
01h  
02h (512 Mb)  
20h (512 Mb)  
xxh  
Description  
Manufacturer ID for Spansion  
Device ID MSB - Memory Interface Type  
Device ID LSB - Density  
ID-CFI Length - number bytes following. Adding this  
value to the current location of 03h gives the address of  
the last valid location in the ID-CFI address map. A value  
of 00h indicates the entire 512-byte ID-CFI space must  
be read because the actual length of the ID-CFI infor-  
mation is longer than can be indicated by this legacy  
single byte field. The value is OPN dependent.  
00h  
01h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
00h (Uniform 256-kB sectors)  
Sector Architecture  
Family ID  
ASCII characters for Model  
Refer to “Ordering information” on page 155 for the  
model number definitions.  
80h (FL-S Family)  
xxh  
xxh  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
0Dh  
0Eh  
0Fh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Table 55  
CFI query identification string  
Data  
Byte address  
Description  
10h  
11h  
12h  
51h  
52h  
59h  
Query Unique ASCII string “QRY”  
13h  
14h  
02h  
00h  
Primary OEM Command Set  
FL-P backward compatible command set ID  
15h  
16h  
40h  
00h  
Address for Primary Extended Table  
17h  
18h  
53h  
46h  
Alternate OEM Command Set  
ASCII characters “FS” for SPI (F) interface, S Technology  
19h  
1Ah  
51h  
00h  
Address for Alternate OEM Extended Table  
Datasheet  
128 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 56  
CFI system interface string  
Byte address  
Data  
Description  
1Bh  
1Ch  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
27h  
36h  
00h  
00h  
06h  
V
V
V
V
CC Min. (erase/program): 100 millivolts  
CC Max. (erase/program): 100 millivolts  
PP Min. voltage (00h = no VPP present)  
PP Max. voltage (00h = no VPP present)  
Typical timeout per single byte program 2N µs  
09h (512B page)  
Typical timeout for Min. size Page program 2N µs  
(00h = not supported)  
21h  
22h  
09h (256 kB)  
11h (512 Mb)  
Typical timeout per individual sector erase 2N ms  
Typical timeout for full chip erase 2N ms (00h = not  
supported)  
23h  
24h  
25h  
02h  
02h  
03h  
Max. timeout for byte program 2N times typical  
Max. timeout for page program 2N times typical  
Max. timeout per individual sector erase 2N times  
typical  
26h  
03h  
Max. timeout for full chip erase 2N times typical  
(00h = not supported)  
Table 57  
Device geometry definition for 512-Mb device  
Data  
Byte address  
Description  
Device Size = 2N bytes;  
27h  
28h  
29h  
1Ah (512 Mb)  
02h  
Flash Device Interface Description;  
0000h = x8 only  
01h  
0001h = x16 only  
0002h = x8/x16 capable  
0003h = x32 only  
0004h = Single I/O SPI, 3-byte address  
0005h = Multi I/O SPI, 3-byte address  
0102h = Multi I/O SPI, 3- or 4-byte address  
2Ah  
2Bh  
09h  
00h  
Max. number of bytes in multi-byte write = 2N  
(0000 = not supported  
0009h = 512B page)  
2Ch  
01h  
Number of Erase Block Regions within device  
1 = Uniform Device, 2 = Boot Device  
2Dh  
2Eh  
2Fh  
FFh  
00h  
00h  
04h  
FFh  
Erase Block Region 1 Information (refer to JEDEC  
JEP137)  
32 sectors = 32-1 = 001Fh  
4-kB sectors = 256 bytes x 0010h  
30h  
31h thru 3Fh  
RFU  
Datasheet  
129 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 58  
CFI primary vendor-specific extended query  
Byte address  
Data  
50h  
52h  
49h  
31h  
33h  
21h  
Description  
Query-unique ASCII string “PRI”  
40h  
41h  
42h  
43h  
44h  
45h  
Major version number = 1, ASCII  
Minor version number = 3, ASCII  
Address Sensitive Unlock (Bits 1-0)  
00b = Required  
01b = Not Required  
Process Technology (Bits 5-2)  
0000b = 0.23 µm Floating Gate  
0001b = 0.17 µm Floating Gate  
0010b = 0.23 µm MirrorBit  
0011b = 0.11 µm Floating Gate  
0100b = 0.11 µm MirrorBit  
0101b = 0.09 µm MirrorBit  
1000b = 0.065 µm MirrorBit  
46h  
02h  
Erase Suspend  
0 = Not Supported  
1 = Read Only  
2 = Read and Program  
47h  
48h  
49h  
01h  
00h  
08h  
Sector Protect  
00 = Not Supported  
X = Number of sectors in group  
Temporary Sector Unprotect  
00 = Not Supported  
01 = Supported  
Sector Protect/Unprotect Scheme  
04 = High Voltage Method  
05 = Software Command Locking Method  
08 = Advanced Sector Protection Method  
09 = Secure  
4Ah  
4Bh  
4Ch  
00h  
01h  
xxh  
Simultaneous Operation  
00 = Not Supported  
X = Number of Sectors  
Burst Mode (Synchronous sequential read) support  
00 = Not Supported  
01 = Supported  
Page Mode Type, model dependent  
00 = Not Supported  
01 = 4 Word Read Page  
02 = 8 Read Word Page  
03 = 256-Byte Program Page  
04 = 512-Byte Program Page  
4Dh  
4Eh  
00h  
00h  
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Minimum  
00 = Not Supported, 100 mV  
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Maximum  
00 = Not Supported, 100 mV  
Datasheet  
130 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 58  
CFI primary vendor-specific extended query (continued)  
Byte address  
Data  
Description  
4Fh  
50h  
07h  
WP# Protection  
01 = Whole Chip  
04 = Uniform Device with Bottom WP Protect  
05 = Uniform Device with Top WP Protect  
07 = Uniform Device with Top or Bottom Write Protect (user select)  
Program Suspend  
00 = Not Supported  
01 = Supported  
01h  
The Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query provides information related to the expanded command set  
provided by the FL-S family. The alternate query parameters use a format in which each parameter begins with  
an identifier byte and a parameter length byte. Driver software can check each parameter ID and can use the  
length value to skip to the next parameter if the parameter is not needed or not recognized by the software.  
Table 59  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query header  
Byte address  
Data  
41h  
4Ch  
54h  
32h  
30h  
Description  
51h  
52h  
53h  
54h  
55h  
Query-unique ASCII string “ALT”  
Major version number = 2, ASCII  
Minor version number = 0, ASCII  
Table 60  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 0  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
Parameter ID (Ordering Part Number)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the  
next parameter)  
00h  
01h  
00h  
10h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
0Dh  
0Eh  
0Fh  
10h  
11h  
53h  
32h  
35h  
46h  
4Ch  
ASCII “S” for manufacturer (Spansion)  
ASCII “25” for Product Characters (Single Die SPI)  
ASCII “FL” for Interface Characters (SPI 3 Volt)  
35h (512 Mb) ASCII characters for density  
31h (512 Mb)  
32h (512 Mb)  
53h  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
ASCII “S” for Technology (65nm MirrorBit)  
Reserved for Future Use (RFU)  
Datasheet  
131 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 61  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 80h address options  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
Parameter ID (Ordering Part Number)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the next  
parameter)  
00h  
01h  
80h  
01h  
02h  
F0h  
Bits 7:4 - Reserved = 1111b  
Bit 3 - AutoBoot support - Ye s= 0b, No = 1b  
Bit 2 - 4-byte address instructions supported - Yes = 0b, No = 1b  
Bit 1 - Bank address + 3-byte address instructions supported - Yes = 0b, No  
= 1b  
Bit 0 - 3-byte address instructions supported - Yes = 0b, No = 1b  
Table 62  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 84h suspend commands  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
Parameter ID (Suspend Commands  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the next  
parameter)  
00h  
01h  
84h  
08h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
08h  
09h  
85h  
28h  
8Ah  
64h  
75h  
28h  
7Ah  
64h  
Program suspend instruction code  
Program suspend latency maximum (µs)  
Program resume instruction code  
Program resume to next suspend typical (µs)  
Erase suspend instruction code  
Erase suspend latency maximum (µs)  
Erase resume instruction code  
Erase resume to next suspend typical (µs)  
Table 63  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 88h data protection  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
Parameter ID (Data Protection)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the next  
parameter)  
OTP size 2N bytes, FFh = not supported  
OTP address map format, 01h = FL-S format, FFh = not supported  
Block Protect Type, model dependent  
00h = FL-P, FL-S, FFh = not supported  
00h  
01h  
88h  
04h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
0Ah  
01h  
xxh  
05h  
xxh  
Advanced Sector Protection type, model dependent  
01h = FL-S ASP  
Datasheet  
132 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 64  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 8Ch reset timing  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
00h  
01h  
8Ch  
06h  
Parameter ID (Reset Timing)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the  
next parameter)  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
96h  
01h  
23h  
00h  
23h  
00h  
POR maximum value  
POR maximum exponent 2N µs  
Hardware Reset maximum value, FFh = not supported  
Hardware Reset maximum exponent 2N µs  
Software Reset maximum value, FFh = not supported  
Software Reset maximum exponent 2N µs  
Table 65  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 90h - HPLC(SDR)  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
Parameter ID (Latency Code Table)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the  
next parameter)  
00h  
01h  
90h  
56h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
0Dh  
0Eh  
0Fh  
10h  
11h  
12h  
13h  
14h  
15h  
16h  
06h  
0Eh  
46h  
43h  
03h  
13h  
0Bh  
0Ch  
3Bh  
3Ch  
6Bh  
6Ch  
BBh  
BCh  
EBh  
ECh  
32h  
03h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
Number of rows  
Row length in bytes  
Start of header (row 1), ASCII “F” for frequency column header  
ASCII “C” for Code column header  
Read 3-byte address instruction  
Read 4-byte address instruction  
Read Fast 3-byte address instruction  
Read Fast 4-byte address instruction  
Read Dual Out 3-byte address instruction  
Read Dual Out 4-byte address instruction  
Read Quad Out 3-byte address instruction  
Read Quad Out 4-byte address instruction  
Dual I/O Read 3-byte address instruction  
Dual I/O Read 4-byte address instruction  
Quad I/O Read 3-byte address instruction  
Quad I/O Read 4-byte address instruction  
Start of row 2, SCK frequency limit for this row (50 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (11b)  
Read mode cycles  
Read latency cycles  
Read Fast mode cycles  
Datasheet  
133 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 65  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 90h - HPLC(SDR) (continued)  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
17h  
18h  
19h  
1Ah  
1Bh  
1Ch  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
24h  
25h  
26h  
27h  
28h  
29h  
2Ah  
2Bh  
2Ch  
2Dh  
2Eh  
2Fh  
30h  
31h  
32h  
33h  
34h  
35h  
36h  
37h  
38h  
39h  
3Ah  
3Bh  
3Ch  
3Dh  
00h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
04h  
02h  
01h  
50h  
00h  
FFh  
FFh  
00h  
08h  
00h  
08h  
00h  
08h  
00h  
04h  
02h  
04h  
5Ah  
01h  
FFh  
FFh  
00h  
08h  
00h  
08h  
00h  
08h  
00h  
05h  
02h  
04h  
68h  
02h  
Read Fast latency cycles  
Read Dual Out mode cycles  
Read Dual Out latency cycles  
Read Quad Out mode cycles  
Read Quad Out latency cycles  
Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Quad I/O Read mode cycles  
Quad I/O Read latency cycles  
Start of row 3, SCK frequency limit for this row (80 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (00b)  
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)  
Read latency cycles  
Read Fast mode cycles  
Read Fast latency cycles  
Read Dual Out mode cycles  
Read Dual Out latency cycles  
Read Quad Out mode cycles  
Read Quad Out latency cycles  
Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Quad I/O Read mode cycles  
Quad I/O Read latency cycles  
Start of row 4, SCK frequency limit for this row (90 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (01b)  
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)  
Read latency cycles  
Read Fast mode cycles  
Read Fast latency cycles  
Read Dual Out mode cycles  
Read Dual Out latency cycles  
Read Quad Out mode cycles  
Read Quad Out latency cycles  
Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Quad I/O Read mode cycles  
Quad I/O Read latency cycles  
Start of row 5, SCK frequency limit for this row (104 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (10b)  
Datasheet  
134 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 65  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 90h - HPLC(SDR) (continued)  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
3Eh  
3Fh  
40h  
41h  
42h  
43h  
44h  
45h  
46h  
47h  
48h  
49h  
4Ah  
4Bh  
4Ch  
4Dh  
4Eh  
4Fh  
50h  
51h  
52h  
53h  
54h  
55h  
56h  
57h  
FFh  
FFh  
00h  
08h  
00h  
08h  
00h  
08h  
00h  
06h  
02h  
05h  
85h  
02h  
FFh  
FFh  
00h  
08h  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)  
Read latency cycles  
Read Fast mode cycles  
Read Fast latency cycles  
Read Dual Out mode cycles  
Read Dual Out latency cycles  
Read Quad Out mode cycles  
Read Quad Out latency cycles  
Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Quad I/O Read mode cycles  
Quad I/O Read latency cycles  
Start of row 6, SCK frequency limit for this row (133 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (10b)  
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)  
Read latency cycles  
Read Fast mode cycles  
Read Fast latency cycles  
Read Dual Out mode cycles  
Read Dual Out latency cycles  
Read Quad Out mode cycles  
Read Quad Out latency cycles  
Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Quad I/O Read mode cycles  
Quad I/O Read latency cycles  
Table 66  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 9Ah - HPLC DDR  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
Parameter ID (Latency Code Table)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the  
next parameter)  
00h  
01h  
9Ah  
2Ah  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
05h  
08h  
46h  
43h  
0Dh  
0Eh  
Number of rows  
Row length in bytes  
Start of header (row 1), ASCII “F” for frequency column header  
ASCII “C” for Code column header  
Read Fast DDR 3-byte address instruction  
Read Fast DDR 4-byte address instruction  
Datasheet  
135 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 66  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 9Ah - HPLC DDR (continued)  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
0Dh  
0Eh  
0Fh  
10h  
11h  
12h  
13h  
14h  
15h  
16h  
17h  
18h  
19h  
1Ah  
1Bh  
1Ch  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
24h  
25h  
26h  
27h  
28h  
29h  
2Ah  
2Bh  
BDh  
BEh  
EDh  
EEh  
32h  
03h  
00h  
04h  
00h  
04h  
01h  
03h  
42h  
00h  
00h  
05h  
00h  
06h  
01h  
06h  
42h  
01h  
00h  
06h  
00h  
07h  
01h  
07h  
42h  
02h  
00h  
07h  
00h  
08h  
01h  
08h  
DDR Dual I/O Read 3-byte address instruction  
DDR Dual I/O Read 4-byte address instruction  
Read DDR Quad I/O 3-byte address instruction  
Read DDR Quad I/O 4-byte address instruction  
Start of row 2, SCK frequency limit for this row (50 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (11b)  
Read Fast DDR mode cycles  
Read Fast DDR latency cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles  
Start of row 3, SCK frequency limit for this row (66 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (00b)  
Read Fast DDR mode cycles  
Read Fast DDR latency cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles  
Start of row 4, SCK frequency limit for this row (66 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (01b)  
Read Fast DDR mode cycles  
Read Fast DDR latency cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles  
Start of row 5, SCK frequency limit for this row (66 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (10b)  
Read Fast DDR mode cycles  
Read Fast DDR latency cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles  
Datasheet  
136 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 67  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 90h - EHPLC (SDR)  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
Parameter ID (Latency Code Table)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the  
next parameter)  
00h  
01h  
90h  
56h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
0Dh  
0Eh  
0Fh  
10h  
11h  
12h  
13h  
14h  
15h  
16h  
17h  
18h  
19h  
1Ah  
1Bh  
1Ch  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
24h  
06h  
0Eh  
46h  
43h  
03h  
13h  
0Bh  
0Ch  
3Bh  
3Ch  
6Bh  
6Ch  
BBh  
BCh  
EBh  
ECh  
32h  
03h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
04h  
00h  
02h  
01h  
50h  
00h  
FFh  
FFh  
00h  
Number of rows  
Row length in bytes  
Start of header (row 1), ASCII “F” for frequency column header  
ASCII “C” for Code column header  
Read 3-byte address instruction  
Read 4-byte address instruction  
Read Fast 3-byte address instruction  
Read Fast 4-byte address instruction  
Read Dual Out 3-byte address instruction  
Read Dual Out 4-byte address instruction  
Read Quad Out 3-byte address instruction  
Read Quad Out 4-byte address instruction  
Dual I/O Read 3-byte address instruction  
Dual I/O Read 4-byte address instruction  
Quad I/O Read 3-byte address instruction  
Quad I/O Read 4-byte address instruction  
Start of row 2, SCK frequency limit for this row (50 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (11b)  
Read mode cycles  
Read latency cycles  
Read Fast mode cycles  
Read Fast latency cycles  
Read Dual Out mode cycles  
Read Dual Out latency cycles  
Read Quad Out mode cycles  
Read Quad Out latency cycles  
Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Quad I/O Read mode cycles  
Quad I/O Read latency cycles  
Start of row 3, SCK frequency limit for this row (80 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (00b)  
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)  
Read latency cycles  
Read Fast mode cycles  
Datasheet  
137 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 67  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 90h - EHPLC (SDR) (continued)  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
25h  
26h  
27h  
28h  
29h  
2Ah  
2Bh  
2Ch  
2Dh  
2Eh  
2Fh  
30h  
31h  
32h  
33h  
34h  
35h  
36h  
37h  
38h  
39h  
3Ah  
3Bh  
3Ch  
3Dh  
3Eh  
3Fh  
40h  
41h  
42h  
43h  
44h  
45h  
46h  
47h  
48h  
49h  
4Ah  
4Bh  
08h  
00h  
08h  
00h  
08h  
04h  
00h  
02h  
04h  
5Ah  
01h  
FFh  
FFh  
00h  
08h  
00h  
08h  
00h  
08h  
04h  
01h  
02h  
04h  
68h  
02h  
FFh  
FFh  
00h  
08h  
00h  
08h  
00h  
08h  
04h  
02h  
02h  
05h  
85h  
02h  
Read Fast latency cycles  
Read Dual Out mode cycles  
Read Dual Out latency cycles  
Read Quad Out mode cycles  
Read Quad Out latency cycles  
Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Quad I/O Read mode cycles  
Quad I/O Read latency cycles  
Start of row 4, SCK frequency limit for this row (90 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (01b)  
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)  
Read latency cycles  
Read Fast mode cycles  
Read Fast latency cycles  
Read Dual Out mode cycles  
Read Dual Out latency cycles  
Read Quad Out mode cycles  
Read Quad Out latency cycles  
Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Quad I/O Read mode cycles  
Quad I/O Read latency cycles  
Start of row 5, SCK frequency limit for this row (104 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (10b)  
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)  
Read latency cycles  
Read Fast mode cycles  
Read Fast latency cycles  
Read Dual Out mode cycles  
Read Dual Out latency cycles  
Read Quad Out mode cycles  
Read Quad Out latency cycles  
Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Quad I/O Read mode cycles  
Quad I/O Read latency cycles  
Start of row 6, SCK frequency limit for this row (133 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (10b)  
Datasheet  
138 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 67  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 90h - EHPLC (SDR) (continued)  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
4Ch  
4Dh  
4Eh  
4Fh  
50h  
51h  
52h  
53h  
54h  
55h  
56h  
57h  
FFh  
FFh  
00h  
08h  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
Read mode cycles (FFh = command not supported at this frequency)  
Read latency cycles  
Read Fast mode cycles  
Read Fast latency cycles  
Read Dual Out mode cycles  
Read Dual Out latency cycles  
Read Quad Out mode cycles  
Read Quad Out latency cycles  
Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Quad I/O Read mode cycles  
Quad I/O Read latency cycles  
Table 68  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 9Ah - EHPLC DDR  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
Parameter ID (Latency Code Table)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the  
next parameter)  
00h  
01h  
9Ah  
2Ah  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
0Dh  
0Eh  
0Fh  
10h  
11h  
12h  
13h  
14h  
15h  
05h  
08h  
46h  
43h  
0Dh  
0Eh  
BDh  
BEh  
EDh  
EEh  
32h  
03h  
04h  
01h  
02h  
02h  
01h  
03h  
42h  
00h  
Number of rows  
Row length in bytes  
Start of header (row 1), ASCII “F” for frequency column header  
ASCII “C” for Code column header  
Read Fast DDR 3-byte address instruction  
Read Fast DDR 4-byte address instruction  
DDR Dual I/O Read 3-byte address instruction  
DDR Dual I/O Read 4-byte address instruction  
Read DDR Quad I/O 3-byte address instruction  
Read DDR Quad I/O 4-byte address instruction  
Start of row 2, SCK frequency limit for this row (50 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (11b)  
Read Fast DDR mode cycles  
Read Fast DDR latency cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles  
Start of row 3, SCK frequency limit for this row (66 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (00b)  
Datasheet  
139 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 68  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter 9Ah - EHPLC DDR (continued)  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
16h  
17h  
18h  
19h  
1Ah  
1Bh  
1Ch  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
24h  
25h  
26h  
27h  
28h  
29h  
2Ah  
2Bh  
04h  
02h  
02h  
04h  
01h  
06h  
42h  
01h  
04h  
04h  
02h  
05h  
01h  
07h  
42h  
02h  
04h  
05h  
02h  
06h  
01h  
08h  
Read Fast DDR mode cycles  
Read Fast DDR latency cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles  
Start of row 4, SCK frequency limit for this row (66 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (01b)  
Read Fast DDR mode cycles  
Read Fast DDR latency cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles  
Start of row 5, SCK frequency limit for this row (66 MHz)  
Latency Code for this row (10b)  
Read Fast DDR mode cycles  
Read Fast DDR latency cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read mode cycles  
DDR Dual I/O Read latency cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O mode cycles  
Read DDR Quad I/O latency cycles  
Table 69  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter F0h RFU  
Parameter relative  
byte address offset  
Data  
Description  
00h  
01h  
F0h  
0Fh  
Parameter ID (RFU)  
Parameter Length (The number of following bytes in this parameter.  
Adding this value to the current location value +1 = the first byte of the  
next parameter)  
02h  
...  
10h  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
Datasheet  
140 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 70  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B  
CFI Parameter SFDP Parameter  
SFDP  
Dword  
name  
relative byte  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset address offset  
00h  
01h  
N/A  
N/A  
A5h  
50h  
CFI Parameter ID (JEDEC SFDP)  
CFI Parameter Length (The number of following  
bytes in this parameter. Adding this value to the  
current location value +1 = the first byte of the  
next parameter)  
02h  
00h  
JEDEC  
BasicFlash  
Parameter  
Dword-1  
E7h  
Start of SFDP JEDEC parameter, located at 1120h  
in the overall SFDP address space. Bits 7:5 =  
unused = 111b Bit 4:3 = 06h is status register write  
instruction & status register is default  
non-volatile= 00b Bit 2 = Program Buffer >  
64Bytes = 1 Bits 1:0 = Uniform 4KB erase  
unavailable = 11b  
03h  
04h  
01h  
02h  
FFh  
F3h  
Bits 15:8 = Uniform 4KB erase opcode = not  
supported = FFh  
Bit 23 = Unused = 1b Bit 22 = Supports Quad Out  
(FLxxxSAG) Read = Yes = 1b Bit 21 = Supports Quad I/O Read  
F7h  
= Yes =1b Bit 20 = Supports Dual I/O Read = Yes =  
(FLxxxSDP) 1b Bit19 = Supports DDR 0= No, 1 = Yes Bit 18:17 =  
Number of Address Bytes, 3 or 4 = 01b Bit 16 =  
Supports Dual Out Read = Yes = 1b  
05h  
06h  
07h  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
08h  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
1Fh  
44h  
Bits 31:24 = Unused = FFh  
Density in bits, zero based, 512Mb = 1FFFFFFFh  
JEDEC  
BasicFlash  
Parameter  
Dword-2  
JEDEC  
BasicFlash  
Parameter  
Dword-3  
Bits 7:5 = number of Quad I/O Mode cycles = 010b  
Bits 4:0 = number of Quad I/O Dummy cycles =  
00100b for default latency code 00b  
0Bh  
0Ch  
09h  
0Ah  
EBh  
08h  
Quad I/O instruction code  
Bits 23:21 = number of Quad Out Mode cycles =  
000b Bits 20:16 = number of Quad Out Dummy  
cycles = 01000b  
0Dh  
0Eh  
0Bh  
0Ch  
6Bh  
08h  
Quad Out instruction code  
JEDEC  
BasicFlash  
Parameter  
Dword-4  
Bits 7:5 = number of Dual Out Mode cycles = 000b  
Bits 4:0 = number of Dual Out Dummy cycles =  
01000b for default latency code  
0Fh  
10h  
0Dh  
0Eh  
3Bh  
Dual Out instruction code  
04h(HPLC) Bits 23:21 = number of Dual I/O Mode cycles =  
80h 100b for EHPLC or 000b for HPLC Bits 20:16 =  
(EHPLC) number of Dual I/O Dummy cycles = 00000b for  
EHPLC or 00100b for HPLC Default Latency code  
= 00b  
11h  
0Fh  
BBh  
Dual I/O instruction code  
Datasheet  
141 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 70  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (continued)  
CFI Parameter SFDP Parameter  
SFDP  
Dword  
name  
relative byte  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset address offset  
12h  
10h  
JEDEC  
BasicFlash  
Parameter  
Dword-5  
EEh  
Bits 7:5 RFU = 111b Bit 4 = Quad All supported =  
No = 0b Bits 3:1 RFU = 111b Bit 0 = Dual All not  
supported = 0b  
Bits 15:8 = RFU = FFh  
Bits 23:16 = RFU = FFh  
Bits 31:24 = RFU = FFh  
Bits 7:0 = RFU = FFh  
Bits 15:8 = RFU = FFh  
13h  
14h  
15h  
16h  
17h  
18h  
11h  
12h  
13h  
14h  
15h  
16h  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
JEDEC  
BasicFlash  
Parameter  
Dword-6  
Bits 23:21 = number of Dual All Mode cycles = 111b  
Bits 20:16 = number of Dual All Dummy cycles =  
11111b  
19h  
1Ah  
1Bh  
1Ch  
1Dh  
17h  
18h  
19h  
1Ah  
1Bh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
EBh  
Dual All instruction code  
Bits 7:0 = RFU = FFh  
JEDEC  
BasicFlash  
Parameter  
Dword-7  
Bits 15:8 = RFU = FFh  
Bits 23:21 = number of Quad All Mode cycles =  
111b Bits 20:16 = number of Quad All Dummy  
cycles = 11111b  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
24h  
25h  
1Ch  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
JEDEC  
BasicFlash  
Parameter  
Dword-8  
00h  
FFh  
00h  
FFh  
12h  
D8h  
00h  
FFh  
Quad All mode Quad I/O (4-4-4) instruction code  
Erase type 1 instruction = not supported = FFh  
Erase type 2 size 2N Bytes = not supported = 00h  
Erase type 2 instruction = not supported = FFh  
Erase type 3 size 2N Bytes = 256KB = 12h  
Erase type 3 instruction  
JEDEC  
BasicFlash  
Parameter  
Dword-9  
Erase type 4 size 2N Bytes = not supported = 00h  
Erase type 4 instruction = not supported = FFh  
Datasheet  
142 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 70  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (continued)  
CFI Parameter SFDP Parameter  
SFDP  
Dword  
name  
relative byte  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset address offset  
26h  
27h  
28h  
29h  
24h  
25h  
26h  
27h  
JEDEC  
F2h  
FFh  
0Fh  
FFh  
Bits 31:30 = Erase type 4 Erase, Typical time units  
(00b: 1 ms, 01b: 16 ms, 10b: 128 ms, 11b: 1 s) = RFU  
= 11b Bits 29:25 = Erase type 4 Erase, Typical time  
count = RFU = 11111b ( typ erase time = count +1  
* units = RFU ) Bits 24:23 = Erase type 3 Erase,  
Typical time units (00b: 1 ms, 01b: 16 ms, 10b: 128  
ms, 11b: 1 s) = 128mS = 10b Bits 22:18 = Erase type  
3 Erase, Typical time count = 00011b ( typ erase  
time = count +1 * units = 4*128mS = 512mS) Bits  
17:16 = Erase type 2 Erase, Typical time units (00b:  
1 ms, 01b: 16 ms, 10b: 128 ms, 11b: 1 s) = RFU =  
11b Bits 15:11 = Erase type 2 Erase, Typical time  
count = RFU = 11111b ( typ erase time = count +1  
* units = RFU ) Bits 10:9 = Erase type 1 Erase,  
Typical time units (00b: 1 ms, 01b: 16 ms, 10b: 128  
ms, 11b: 1 s) = RFU = 11b Bits 8:4 = Erase type 1  
Erase, Typical time count = RFU = 11111b ( typ  
erase time = count +1 * units = RFU ) Bits 3:0 =  
Multiplier from typical erase time to maximum  
erase time = 2*(N+1), N=2h = 6x multiplier Binary  
Fields:  
BasicFlash  
Parameter  
Dword-10  
11-11111-10-00011-11-11111-11-11111-0010  
Nibble Format:  
1111_1111_0000_1111_1111_1111_1111_0010  
Hex Format: FF_0F_FF_F2  
Datasheet  
143 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 70  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (continued)  
CFI Parameter SFDP Parameter  
SFDP  
Dword  
name  
relative byte  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset address offset  
2Ah  
2Bh  
2Ch  
2Dh  
28h  
29h  
2Ah  
2Bh  
JEDEC  
91h  
25h  
07h  
D9h  
Bit 31 Reserved = 1b Bits 30:29 = Chip Erase,  
Typical time units (00b: 16 ms, 01b: 256 ms, 10b:  
4 s, 11b: 64 s) = 4s = 10b Bits 28:24 = Chip Erase,  
Typical time count, (count+1)*units, count =  
11001b, ( typ Program time = count +1 * units =  
26*.4uS = 104S Bits 23 = Byte Program Typical  
time, additional byte units (0b:1uS, 1b:8uS) = 1uS  
= 0b Bits 22:19 = Byte Program Typical time,  
additional byte count, (count+1)*units, count =  
0000b, ( typ Program time = count +1 * units =  
1*1uS = 1uS Bits 18 = Byte Program Typical time,  
first byte units (0b:1uS, 1b:8uS) = 8uS = 1b Bits  
17:14 = Byte Program Typical time, first byte  
count, (count+1)*units, count = 1100b, ( typ  
Program time = count +1 * units = 13*8uS = 104uS  
Bits 13 = Page Program Typical time units  
(0b:8uS, 1b:64uS) = 64uS = 1b Bits 12:8 = Page  
Program Typical time count, (count+1)*units,  
count = 00101b, ( typ Program time = count +1 *  
units =6*64uS = 384uS) Bits 7:4 = Page size 2N,  
N=9h, = 512B page Bits 3:0 = Multiplier from  
typical time to maximum for Page or Byte  
program = 2*(N+1), N=1h = 4x multiplier Binary  
Fields:  
BasicFlash  
Parameter  
Dword-11  
1-10-11001-0-0000-1-1100-1-00101-1001-0001  
Nibble Format:  
1101_1001_0000_0111_0010_0101_1001_0001  
Hex Format: D9_07_25_91  
Datasheet  
144 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 70  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (continued)  
CFI Parameter SFDP Parameter  
SFDP  
Dword  
name  
relative byte  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset address offset  
2Eh  
2Fh  
30h  
31h  
2Ch  
2Dh  
2Eh  
2Fh  
JEDEC  
ECh  
83h  
18h  
45h  
Bit 31 = Suspend and Resume supported = 0b Bits  
30:29 = Suspend in-progress erase max latency  
units (00b: 128ns, 01b: 1us, 10b: 8us, 11b: 64us) =  
8us= 10b Bits 28:24 = Suspend in-progress erase  
max latency count = 00101b, max erase suspend  
latency = count +1 * units = 6*8uS = 48uS Bits  
23:20 = Erase resume to suspend interval count =  
0001b, interval = count +1 * 64us = 2 * 64us = 128us  
Bits 19:18 = Suspend in-progress program max  
latency units (00b: 128ns, 01b: 1us, 10b: 8us, 11b:  
64us) = 8us= 10b Bits 17:13 = Suspend in-progress  
program max latency count = 00100b, max erase  
suspend latency = count +1 * units = 5*8uS = 40uS  
Bits 12:9 = Program resume to suspend interval  
count = 0001b, interval = count +1 * 64us = 2 * 64us  
= 128us Bit 8 = RFU = 1b Bits 7:4 = Prohibited  
operations during erase suspend = xxx0b: May  
not initiate a new erase anywhere (erase nesting  
not permitted) + xx1xb: May not initiate a page  
program in the erase suspended sector size +  
x1xxb: May not initiate a read in the erase  
suspended sector size + 1xxxb: The erase and  
program restrictions in bits 5:4 are sufficient =  
1110b Bits 3:0 = Prohibited Operations During  
Program Suspend = xxx0b: May not initiate a new  
erase anywhere (erase nesting not permitted) +  
xx0xb: May not initiate a new page program  
anywhere (program nesting not permitted) +  
x1xxb: May not initiate a read in the program  
suspended page size + 1xxxb: The erase and  
program restrictions in bits 1:0 are sufficient =  
1100b Binary Fields:  
BasicFlash  
Parameter  
Dword-12  
0-10-00101-0001-10-00100-0001-1-1110-1100  
Nibble Format:  
0100_0101_0001_1000_1000_0011_1110_1100  
Hex Format: 45_18_83_EC  
32h  
33h  
34h  
35h  
30h  
31h  
32h  
33h  
JEDEC  
8Ah  
85h  
7Ah  
75h  
Bits 31:24 = Erase Suspend Instruction = 75h Bits  
23:16 = Erase Resume Instruction = 7Ah Bits 15:8  
= Program Suspend Instruction = 85h Bits 7:0 =  
Program Resume Instruction = 8Ah  
BasicFlash  
Parameter  
Dword-13  
Datasheet  
145 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 70  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (continued)  
CFI Parameter SFDP Parameter  
SFDP  
Dword  
name  
relative byte  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset address offset  
36h  
37h  
38h  
39h  
34h  
35h  
36h  
37h  
JEDEC  
F7h  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
Bit 31 = Deep Power Down Supported = not  
supported = 1 Bits 30:23 = Enter Deep Power  
Down Instruction = not supported = FFh Bits 22:15  
= Exit Deep Power Down Instruction = not  
supported = FFh Bits 14:13 = Exit Deep Power  
Down to next operation delay units = (00b: 128ns,  
01b: 1us, 10b: 8us, 11b: 64us) = 64us = 11b Bits  
12:8 = Exit Deep Power Down to next operation  
delay count = 11111b, Exit Deep Power Down to  
next operation delay = (count+1)*units = not  
supported Bits 7:4 = RFU = Fh Bit 3:2 = Status  
Register Polling Device Busy = 01b: Legacy status  
polling supported = Use legacy polling by reading  
the Status Register with 05h instruction and  
checking WIP bit[0] (0=ready; 1=busy). Bits 1:0 =  
RFU = 11b Binary Fields:  
BasicFlash  
Parameter  
Dword-14  
1-11111111-11111111-11-11111-1111-01-11  
Nibble Format:  
1111_1111_1111_1111_1111_1111_1111_0111  
Hex Format: FF_FF_FF_F7  
3Ah  
3Bh  
3Ch  
3Dh  
38h  
39h  
3Ah  
3Bh  
JEDEC  
00h  
F6h  
5Dh  
FFh  
Bits 31:24 = RFU = FFh Bit 23 = Hold and WP  
Disable = not supported = 0b Bits 22:20 = Quad  
Enable Requirements = 101b: QE is bit 1 of the  
status register 2. Status register 1 is read using  
Read Status instruction 05h. Status register 2 is  
read using instruction 35h. QE is set via Write  
Status instruction 01h with two data bytes where  
bit 1 of the second byte is one. It is cleared via  
Write Status with two data bytes where bit 1 of  
the second byte is zero. Bits 19:16 0-4-4 Mode  
Entry Method = xxx1b: Mode Bits[7:0] = A5h Note  
QE must be set prior to using this mode + x1xxb:  
Mode Bits[7:0] = Axh + 1xxxb: RFU = 1101b Bits  
15:10 0-4-4 Mode Exit Method = xx_xxx1b: Mode  
Bits[7:0] = 00h will terminate this mode at the end  
of the current read operation + xx_1xxxb: Input Fh  
(mode bit reset) on DQ0-DQ3 for 8 clocks. This will  
terminate the mode prior to the next read  
operation. + x1_xxxxb: Mode Bit[7:0] != Axh +  
1x_x1xx: RFU  
BasicFlash  
Parameter  
Dword-15  
Datasheet  
146 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 70  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (continued)  
CFI Parameter SFDP Parameter  
SFDP  
Dword  
name  
relative byte  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset address offset  
3Eh  
3Fh  
40h  
41h  
3Ch  
3Dh  
3Eh  
3Fh  
JEDEC  
F0h  
28h  
FAh  
A8h  
Bits 31:24 = Enter 4-Byte Addressing = xxxx_1xxxb:  
8-bit volatile bank register used to define  
A[30:A24] bits. MSb (bit[7]) is used to  
BasicFlash  
Parameter  
Dword-16  
enable/disable 4-byte address mode. When MSb  
is set to ‘1, 4-byte address mode is active and  
A[30:24] bits are don’t care. Read with instruction  
16h. Write instruction is 17h with 1 byte of data.  
When MSb is cleared to ‘0, select the active 128  
Mb segment by setting the appropriate A[30:24]  
bits and use 3-Byte addressing. + xx1x_xxxxb:  
Supports dedicated 4-Byte address instruction  
set. Consult vendor data sheet for the instruction  
set definition or look for 4 Byte Address  
Parameter Table. + 1xxx_xxxxb: Reserved =  
10101000b Bits 23:14 = Exit 4-Byte Addressing =  
xx_xxxx_1xxxb: 8-bit volatile bank register used  
to define A[30:A24] bits. MSb (bit[7]) is used to  
enable/disable 4-byte address mode. When MSb  
is cleared to ‘0, 3-byte address mode is active and  
A30:A24 are used to select the active 128 Mb  
memory segment. Read with instruction 16h.  
Write instruction is 17h, data length is 1 byte. +  
xx_xx1x_xxxxb: Hardware reset + xx_x1xx_xxxxb:  
Software reset (see bits 13:8 in this DWORD) +  
xx_1xxx_xxxxb: Power cycle + x1_xxxx_xxxxb:  
Reserved + 1x_xxxx_xxxxb: Reserved =  
1111101000b Bits 13:8 = Soft Reset and Rescue  
Sequence Support = x0_1xxxb: issue instruction  
F0h + 1x_xxxxb: exit 0-4-4 mode is required prior  
to other reset sequences above if the device may  
be operating in this mode. = 101000b Bit 7 = RFU  
= 1 Bits 6:0 = Volatile or Non-volatile Register and  
Write Enable Instruction for Status Register 1 =  
xx1_xxxxb: Status Register 1 contains a mix of  
volatile and non-volatile bits. The 06h instruction  
is used to enable writing of the register. +  
x1x_xxxxb: Reserved + 1xx_xxxxb: Reserved =  
1110000b Binary Fields:  
10101000-1111101000-101000-1-1110000 Nibble  
Format:  
1010_1000_1111_1010_0010_1000_1111_0000  
Hex Format: A8_FA_28_F0  
42h  
43h  
44h  
45h  
40h  
41h  
42h  
43h  
JEDEC  
SectorMap  
Parameter  
Dword-1  
Config-0  
Header  
FFh  
00h  
00h  
FFh  
Bits 31:24 = RFU = FFh Bits 23:16 = Region count  
(Dwords -1) = 00h: One region Bits 15:8 = Configu-  
ration ID = 00h: Uniform 256KB sectors Bits 7:2 =  
RFU = 111111b Bit 1 = Map Descriptor = 1 Bit 0 =  
The end descriptor = 1  
Datasheet  
147 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 70  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (continued)  
CFI Parameter SFDP Parameter  
SFDP  
Dword  
name  
relative byte  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset address offset  
46h  
47h  
48h  
49h  
44h  
45h  
46h  
47h  
JEDEC  
SectorMap  
Parameter  
Dword-2  
Config-0  
F4h  
FFh  
FFh  
03h  
Bits 31:8 = Region size = 00FFFFh: Region size as  
count-1 of 256 Byte units = 64MB/256 = 256K  
Count = 262144, value = count -1 = 262144 -1 =  
262143 = 3FFFFh  
Bits 4:7 = RFU = Fh Erase Type not supported = 0/  
supported = 1  
Region-0  
Bits 3 = Erase Type 4 support = 0b ---Erase Type 4  
is not defined  
Bits 2 = Erase Type 3 support = 1b ---Erase Type 3  
is 256KB erase and is supported in the 256KB  
sector region  
Bits 1 = Erase Type 2 support = 0b ---Erase Type 2  
is 64KB erase and is not supported in the 256KB  
sector region  
Bits 0 = Erase Type 1 support = 0b --- Erase Type 1  
is 4KB erase and is not supported in the 256KB  
sector region  
Format:  
0000_0011_1111_1111_1111_1111_1111_0100  
Hex Format: 03_FF_FF_F4  
4Ah  
4Bh  
4Ch  
4Dh  
48h  
49h  
4Ah  
4Bh  
JEDEC 4  
Byte  
FFh  
E8h  
FFh  
FFh  
Supported = 1, Not Supported = 0 Bits 31:20 = RFU  
= FFFh Bit 19 = Support for non-volatile individual  
sector lock write command, Instruction=E3h = 1  
Bit 18 = Support for non-volatile individual sector  
lock read command, Instruction=E2h = 1 Bit 17 =  
Support for volatile individual sector lock Write  
command, Instruction=E1h = 1 Bit 16 = Support  
for volatile individual sector lock Read command,  
Instruction=E0h = 1 Bit 15 = Support for (1-4-4)  
DTR_Read Command, Instruction=EEh = 1 Bit 14  
= Support for (1-2-2) DTR_Read Command,  
Instruction=BEh = 1 Bit 13 = Support for (1-1-1)  
DTR_Read Command, Instruction=0Eh = 1 Bit 12  
= Support for Erase Command – Type 4 = 0 Bit 11  
= Support for Erase Command – Type 3 = 1 Bit 10  
= Support for Erase Command – Type 2 = 0 Bit 9 =  
Support for Erase Command – Type 1 = 0 Bit 8 =  
Support for (1-4-4) Page Program Command,  
Instruction=3Eh =0 Bit 7 = Support for (1-1-4) Page  
Program Command, Instruction=34h = 1 Bit 6 =  
Support for (1-1-1) Page Program Command,  
Instruction=12h = 1 Bit 5 = Support for (1-4-4)  
FAST_READ Command, Instruction=ECh = 1 Bit 4  
= Support for (1-1-4) FAST_READ Command,  
Instruction=6Ch = 1 Bit 3 = Support for (1-2-2)  
FAST_READ Command, Instruction=BCh = 1 Bit 2  
= Support for (1-1-2) FAST_READ Command,  
Instruction=3Ch = 1 Bit 1 = Support for (1-1-1)  
FAST_READ Command, Instruction=0Ch = 1 Bit 0  
= Support for (1-1-1) READ Command,  
Address  
Instruc-  
tions  
Parameter  
Dword-1  
Instruction=13h = 1  
Datasheet  
148 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 70  
CFI alternate vendor-specific extended query parameter A5h, JEDEC SFDP Rev B (continued)  
CFI Parameter SFDP Parameter  
SFDP  
Dword  
name  
relative byte  
relative byte  
Data  
Description  
address offset address offset  
4Eh  
4Fh  
50h  
51h  
4Ch  
4Dh  
4Eh  
4Fh  
JEDEC 4  
Byte  
FFh  
FFh  
DCh  
FFh  
Bits 31:24 = FFh = Instruction for Erase Type 4: RFU  
Bits 23:16 = DCh = Instruction for Erase Type 3 Bits  
15:8 = FFh = Instruction for Erase Type 2: RFU Bits  
7:0 = FFh = Instruction for Erase Type 1: RFU  
Address  
Instruc-  
tions  
Parameter  
Dword-2  
This parameter type (Parameter ID F0h) may appear multiple times and have a different length each time. The  
parameter is used to reserve space in the ID-CFI map or to force space (pad) to align a following parameter to a  
required boundary.  
11.4  
Device ID and common flash interface (ID-CFI) ASO map — Automotive  
only  
The CFI Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query is extended to include Electronic Marking information for device  
traceability.  
Table 71  
Address  
(SA) + 0180h Size of Electronic Marking  
Device ID and common flash interface ASO map  
Example  
of actual  
data  
# of  
Data  
Data field  
Hex read out of example data  
bytes format  
1
1
Hex  
Hex  
20  
1
14h  
01h  
(SA) + 0181h  
Revision of Electronic  
Marking  
(SA) + 0182h  
(SA) + 018Ah  
(SA) + 018Bh  
(SA) + 018Ch  
(SA) + 018Dh  
(SA) + 0194h  
Fab Lot #  
Wafer #  
Die X Coordinate  
Die Y Coordinate  
Class Lot #  
8
1
1
1
7
ASCII  
Hex  
Hex  
Hex  
ASCII  
N/A  
LD87270 4Ch, 44h, 38h, 37h, 32h, 37h, 30h, FFh  
23  
10  
15  
17h  
0Ah  
0Fh  
BR33150 42h, 52h, 33h, 33h, 31h, 35h, 30h  
Reserved for Future  
12  
N/A  
FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh,  
FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh  
Fab Lot # + Wafer # + Die X Coordinate + Die Y Coordinate gives a unique ID for each device.  
11.5  
Registers  
The register maps are copied in this section as a quick reference. See “Registers” on page 55 for the full  
description of the register contents.  
Table 72  
Status register-1 (SR1)  
Field  
Default  
state  
Bits  
Function  
Type  
Description  
name  
7
SRWD  
Status  
Register  
Write  
Non-volatile  
0
1 = Locks state of SRWD, BP, and configuration  
register bits when WP# is low by ignoring WRR  
command  
Disable  
0 = No protection, even when WP# is low  
6
P_ERR Programmi  
ng Error  
Volatile, Read  
only  
0
1 = Error occurred  
0 = No Error  
Occurred  
Datasheet  
149 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 72  
Status register-1 (SR1)  
Field  
Default  
state  
Bits  
Function  
Type  
Description  
name  
5
E_ERR Erase Error  
Occurred  
Volatile, Read  
only  
0
1= Error occurred  
0 = No Error  
4
3
2
BP2  
BP1  
BP0  
Block  
Protection  
Volatile if  
CR1[3]=1,  
Non-volatile if  
CR1[3]=0  
1 if  
Protects selected range of sectors (Block)  
CR1[3]=1, from Program or Erase  
0 when  
shipped  
from  
Infineon  
1
WEL WriteEnable  
Latch  
Volatile  
0
1 = Device accepts Write Registers (WRR),  
program or erase commands  
0 = Device ignores Write Registers (WRR),  
program or erase commands  
This bit is not affected by WRR, only WREN and  
WRDI commands affect this bit.  
0
WIP  
Write in  
Progress  
Volatile, Read  
only  
0
1= Device Busy, a Write Registers (WRR),  
program, erase or other operation is in  
progress  
0 = Ready Device is in standby mode and can  
accept commands  
Datasheet  
150 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 73  
Bits  
Configuration register (CR1)  
Field  
Default  
state  
Function  
Type  
Description  
name  
7
6
5
LC1  
LC0  
Latency Code Non-volatile  
0
0
0
Selects number of initial read latency cycles  
See Latency Code Tables  
TBPROT Configures Start  
of Block  
OTP  
1 = BP starts at bottom (Low address)  
0 = BP starts at top (High address)  
Protection  
4
3
RFU  
BPNV  
RFU  
RFU  
OTP  
0
0
Reserved for Future Use  
1 = Volatile  
0 = Non-volatile  
ConfiguresBP2-0  
in Status  
Register  
2
1
RFU  
QUAD  
RFU  
RFU  
0
0
Reserved for Future Use  
1 = Quad  
0 = Dual or Serial  
Puts the device Non-volatile  
into Quad I/O  
operation  
0
FREEZE  
Lock current  
state of BP2-0  
bits in Status  
Register,  
Volatile  
0
1 = Block Protection and OTP locked  
0 = Block Protection and OTP un-locked  
TBPROT in  
Configuration  
Register, and  
OTP regions  
Table 74  
Bits  
Status register-2 (SR2)  
Field name Function  
Default  
Type  
Description  
state  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
ES  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
Erase  
Suspend  
Volatile, Read  
only  
1 = In erase suspend mode.  
0 = Not in erase suspend mode.  
0
PS  
Program  
Suspend  
Volatile, Read  
only  
0
1 = In program suspend mode.  
0 = Not in program suspend mode.  
Table 11-1  
Bits  
Bank address register (BAR)  
Field  
Default  
Function  
Type  
Description  
name  
state  
7
EXTADD  
Extended  
Volatile  
Volatile  
0b  
1 = 4-byte (32-bits) addressing required from  
command.  
Address Enable  
0 = 3-byte (24-bits) addressing from command +  
Bank Address  
6 to 2  
RFU  
Reserved  
00000b Reserved for Future Use  
Datasheet  
151 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 11-1  
Bits  
Bank address register (BAR)  
Field  
Default  
state  
Function  
Type  
Description  
A25 for 512 Mb device  
RFU for lower density device  
name  
1
0
BA25  
RFU  
Bank Address  
Bank Address  
Volatile  
Volatile  
0
0
Datasheet  
152 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 75  
ASP register (ASPR)  
Default  
state  
Bits Field name  
Function  
Type  
Description  
Reserved for Future Use  
15 to 9  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
OTP  
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
OTP Note [53] Reserved for Future Use  
OTP  
OTP  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
1
OTP Note [53] Reserved for Future Use  
RFU  
RFU  
OTP  
OTP  
OTP  
Reserved for Future Use  
Reserved for Future Use  
0 = Password Protection Mode permanently enabled.  
1 = Password Protection Mode not permanently  
enabled.  
0 = Persistent Protection Mode permanently enabled.  
1 = Persistent Protection Mode not permanently  
enabled.  
PWDMLB  
Password  
Protection  
Mode Lock Bit  
Persistent  
Protection  
Mode Lock Bit  
1
1
1
1
0
PSTMLB  
RFU  
OTP  
OTP  
Reserved  
Reserved for Future Use  
Table 76  
Bits  
Password register (PASS)  
Field  
Function  
Type  
Default state  
Description  
name  
63 to 0  
PWD  
Hidden  
Password  
OTP  
FFFFFFFF-FFFFF Non-volatile OTP storage of 64-bit password. The  
FFFh  
password is no longer readable after the password  
protection mode is selected by programming ASP  
register bit 2 to zero.  
Table 77  
Bits  
PPB lock register (PPBL)  
Field  
Function  
Type  
Default state  
00h  
Persistent Protection  
Mode = 1  
Password Protection  
Mode = 0  
Description  
name  
7 to 1  
0
RFU  
Reserved  
Volatile  
Reserved for Future Use  
PPBLOCK Protect PPB Volatile  
Array  
0 = PPB array protected until next  
power cycle or hardware reset  
1 = PPB array may be programmed or  
erased  
Table 78  
Bits  
PPB access register (PPBAR)  
Default  
Field name  
Function  
Type  
Non-volatile  
Description  
state  
7 to 0  
PPB  
Read or  
Program per  
sector PPB  
FFh  
00h = PPB for the sector addressed by the  
PPBRD or PPBP command is programmed to  
‘0, protecting that sector from program or  
erase operations.  
FFh = PPB for the sector addressed by the  
PPBRD or PPBP command is erased to ‘1, not  
protecting that sector from program or erase  
operations.  
Note  
53.Default value depends on ordering part number, see “Initial delivery state” on page 154.  
Datasheet  
153 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Software interface reference  
Table 79  
Bits  
DYB access register (DYBAR)  
Field  
Default  
state  
Function  
Type  
Description  
name  
7 to 0  
DYB  
Read or  
Write per  
sector DYB  
Volatile  
FFh  
00h = DYB for the sector addressed by the DYBRD or  
DYBP command is cleared to ‘0, protecting that sector  
from program or erase operations.  
FFh = DYB for the sector addressed by the DYBRD or  
DYBP command is set to ‘1, not protecting that sector  
from program or erase operations.  
Table 80  
Bits  
Non-volatile data learning register (NVDLR)  
Field  
name  
Default  
state  
Function  
Type  
Description  
7 to 0  
NVDLP Non-volatile OTP  
00h  
OTP value that may be transferred to the host during  
DDR read command latency (dummy) cycles to provide  
a training pattern to help the host more accurately  
center the data capture point in the received data bits.  
Data  
Learning  
Pattern  
Table 81  
Volatile data learning register (NVDLR)  
Field  
Default  
state  
Bits  
Function  
Type  
Description  
name  
7 to 0  
VDLP  
Volatile Data Volatile Takes the Volatile copy of the NVDLP used to enable and deliver  
Learning  
Pattern  
value of the Data Learning Pattern (DLP) to the outputs. The  
NVDLR VDLP may be changed by the host during system  
during POR operation.  
or Reset  
11.6  
Initial delivery state  
The device is shipped from Infineon with non-volatile bits set as follows:  
• The entire memory array is erased: i.e. all bits are set to 1 (each byte contains FFh).  
• The OTP address space has the first 16 bytes programmed to a random number. All other bytes are erased to FFh.  
• The SFDP address space contains the values as defined in the description of the SFDP address space.  
• The ID-CFI address space contains the values as defined in the description of the ID-CFI address space.  
• The Status Register 1 contains 00h (all SR1 bits are cleared to 0’s).  
• The Configuration Register 1 contains 00h.  
• The Autoboot register contains 00h.  
• The Password Register contains FFFFFFFF-FFFFFFFFh  
• All PPB bits are 1.  
• The ASP Register contents depend on the ordering options selected:  
Table 82  
ASP register content  
Ordering part number model  
01, 21, 31, R1, A1, B1, C1, D1,91, Q1, 71, 61, 81  
K1, L1. S1, T1, Y1, Z1, M1, N1, U1, V1, W1, X1  
ASPR default value  
FE7Fh  
FE4Fh  
Datasheet  
154 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Ordering information  
12  
Ordering information  
The ordering part number is formed by a valid combination of the following:  
S25FL  
512  
S
AG  
M
F
I
0
1
1
Packing type  
0 = Tray  
1 = Tube  
3 = 13” Tape and Reel  
Model number (Sector Type)  
[54]  
1 = Uniform 256-kB sectors  
Model number (Latency type, Package details, RESET# and V support)  
IO  
0 = EHPLC, SO footprint  
2 = EHPLC, 5 x 5 ball BGA footprint  
3 = EHPLC, 4 x 6 ball BGA footprint  
G = EHPLC, SO footprint with RESET#  
R = EHPLC, SO footprint with RESET# and V  
IO  
A = EHPLC, 5 x 5 ball BGA footprint with RESET# and V  
IO  
B = EHPLC, 4 x 6 ball BGA footprint with RESET# and V  
C = EHPLC, 5 x 5 ball BGA footprint with RESET#  
D = EHPLC, 4 x 6 ball BGA footprint with RESET#  
9 = HPLC, SO footprint  
IO  
4 = HPLC, 5 x 5 ball BGA footprint  
8 = HPLC, 4 x 6 ball BGA footprint  
H = HPLC, SO footprint with RESET#  
Q = HPLC, SO footprint with RESET# and V  
IO  
7 = HPLC, 5 x 5 ball BGA footprint with RESET# and V  
6 = HPLC, 4 x 6 ball BGA footprint with RESET# and V  
E = HPLC, 5 x 5 ball BGA footprint with RESET#  
F = HPLC, 4 x 6 ball BGA footprint with RESET#  
IO  
IO  
Temperature range  
I = Industrial (–40°C to + 85°C)  
V = Industrial Plus (–40°C to + 105°C)  
A = Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 3 (–40°C to + 85°C)  
B = Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 2 (–40°C to + 105°C)  
M = Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 1 (–40°C to + 125°C)  
[57]  
Package materials  
F = Halogen-free, Lead (Pb)-free  
H = Halogen free, Lead (Pb)-free  
Package type  
M = 16-pin SO package  
B = 24-ball BGA 6 x 8 mm package, 1.00 mm pitch  
Speed  
AG = 133 MHz  
DP = 66 MHz DDR  
DS = 80 MHz DDR  
Device technology  
S = 65 nm MirrorBit Process Technology  
Density  
512 = 512 Mb  
Device family  
S25FL  
Infineon Memory 3.0 V-Only, Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Flash Memory  
Notes  
54.Uniform 256-kB sectors = All sectors are uniform 256-kB with a 512B programming buffer.  
55.EHPLC = Enhanced High Performance Latency Code table.  
56.HPLC = High Performance Latency Code table.  
57.Halogen free definition is in accordance with IE 61249-2-21 specification.  
Datasheet  
155 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Ordering information  
12.1  
Valid combinations — Standard  
Valid Combinations list configurations planned to be supported in volume for this device. Consult your local sales  
office to confirm availability of specific valid combinations and to check on newly released combinations.  
Table 83  
Valid combinations - Standard  
Valid combinations — Standard  
Base Or-  
deringpart  
number  
Speed Package and  
Model  
Packing  
type  
Package marking[58]  
option temperature number  
MFI, MFV  
BHI, BHV  
01, G1, R1  
21, 31, A1,  
B1, C1, D1  
01, G1  
21, 31, C1,  
D1  
01, G1, R1  
21, 31, A1,  
B1, C1, D1  
0, 1, 3 FL512S + A + (Temp) + F + (Model Number)  
0, 3 FL512S + A + (Temp) + H + (Model Number)  
AG  
DP  
DS  
MFI, MFV  
BHI, BHV  
0, 1, 3 FL512S + D + (Temp) + F + (Model Number)  
0, 3 FL512S + D + (Temp) + H + (Model Number)  
S25FL512S  
MFI, MFV  
BHI, BHV  
0, 1, 3 FL512S + S + (Temp) + F + (Model Number)  
0, 3 FL512S + S + (Temp) + H + (Model Number)  
12.2  
Valid combinations — Automotive Grade / AEC-Q100  
The table below lists configurations that are Automotive Grade / AEC-Q100 qualified and are planned to be  
available in volume. The table will be updated as new combinations are released. Consult your local sales repre-  
sentative to confirm availability of specific combinations and to check on newly released combinations.  
Production Part Approval Process (PPAP) support is only provided for AEC-Q100 grade products.  
Products to be used in end-use applications that require ISO/TS-16949 compliance must be AEC-Q100 grade  
products in combination with PPAP. Non–AEC-Q100 grade products are not manufactured or documented in full  
compliance with ISO/TS-16949 requirements.  
AEC-Q100 grade products are also offered without PPAP support for end-use applications that do not require  
ISO/TS-16949 compliance.  
Table 84  
Valid combinations - Automotive Grade/AEC-Q100  
Valid combinations — Automotive Grade / AEC-Q100  
Package  
Base order-  
ing part  
Speed  
option  
Model  
Packing  
type  
and tem-  
perature  
Package marking  
number  
number  
MFA, MFB, 01, G1, R1  
MFM  
0, 1, 3  
0, 3  
FL512S + A + (Temp) + F + (Model Number)  
FL512S + A + (Temp) + H + (Model Number)  
AG  
DP  
DS  
DP  
BHA, BHB, 21, 31, A1,  
BHM  
BHB  
B1, C1, D1  
21, C1  
0, 3  
0, 1, 3  
FL512S + D + (Temp) + H + (Model Number)  
FL512S + S + (Temp) + F + (Model Number)  
S25FL512S  
MFA, MFB, 01, G1, R1  
MFM  
BHA, BHB, 21, 31, A1,  
0, 3  
0
FL512S + S + (Temp) + H + (Model Number)  
FL512S + D + (Temp) + F+ (Model Number)  
BHM  
MFA, MFB  
B1, C1, D1  
G1  
Note  
58.Example, S25FL512SAGMFI000 package marking would be FL512SAIF00.  
Datasheet  
156 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Revision history  
Revision history  
Document  
Date of release  
version.  
Description of changes  
**  
*A  
2011-12-20  
2012-03-02  
Initial release  
General: Changed data sheet designation from Advance Information to Prelim-  
inary  
Performance Summary: Current Consumption table: corrected Serial Read 50  
MHz and Serial Read 133 MHz values  
DC Characteristics: DC Characteristics table: corrected ICC1 values  
SDR AC Characteristics: AC Characteristics (Single Die Package, VIO = VCC 2.7V to  
3.6V) table: corrected TCSH and TSU Max values  
AC Characteristics (Single Die Package, VIO 1.65V to 2.7V, VCC 2.7V to 3.6V) table:  
corrected TCSH and TSU Max values  
Embedded Algorithm Performance Tables: Program and Erase Performance  
table: corrected TW Typ and Max values  
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) Address Map: Updated table: CFI  
Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter 0  
*B  
2012-05-02  
Global: Added 105°C updates  
Ordering Information: Updated Valid Combinations table  
Embedded Algorithm Performance Tables: Updated table: Program and Erase  
Performance  
*C  
*D  
*E  
2012-06-13  
2013-04-12  
2013-12-20  
SDR AC Characteristics: Updated tHO value from 0 Min to 2 ns Min  
Global: Data Sheet designation updated from Preliminary to Full Production  
Global 80 MHz DDR Read operation added  
Performance Summary:  
Updated Maximum Read Rates DDR (VIO = VCC = 3V to 3.6V) table  
Current Consumption table: added Quad DDR Read 80 MHz  
Migration Notes FL Generations Comparison table: updated DDR values for FL-S  
SDR AC Characteristics:Updated Clock Timing figure  
DDR AC Characteristics: Updated AC Characteristics — DDR Operation table  
DDR Output Timing: Updated SPI DDR Data Valid Window figure and Notes  
Ordering Information:  
Added 80 MHz to Speed option  
Valid Combinations table: added DS to Speed Option  
*F  
*G  
2014-01-08  
2014-12-18  
DDR AC Characteristics: Removed AC Characteristics 80 MHz Operation table.  
SDR AC Characteristics: AC Characteristics (Single Die Package, VIO = VCC 2.7V to  
3.6V) table: removed tV (Min) value.  
AC Characteristics (Single Die Package, VIO 1.65V to 2.7V, VCC 2.7V to 3.6V) table:  
removed tV (Min) value.  
Bank Address Register: Bank Address Register (BAR) table: corrected Bit 0.  
Serial Flash Discoverable Parameters (SFDP) Address Map:  
Updated section SFDP Overview Map table: updated  
Field Definitions: updated SFDP Header table.  
Device ID and Common Flash Interface (ID-CFI) Address Map: Field Definitions:  
added CFI Alternate Vendor-Specific Extended Query Parameter A5h, JEDEC  
SFDP Rev B table.  
Datasheet  
157 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Revision history  
Document  
Date of release  
version.  
Description of changes  
*H  
2015-01-21  
Capacitance Characteristics: Capacitance table: added TA = 25°C under Test  
Conditions.  
SDR AC Characteristics: AC Characteristics (Single Die Package, VIO = VCC 2.7V to  
3.6V) table: changed tSU (Min).  
Configuration Register 1 (CR1): Latency Codes for DDR Enhanced High Perfor-  
mance table: added 80 MHz  
Command Set Summary: S25FL512S Command Set (sorted by function) table:  
updated Maximum Frequency (MHz) of DDR Command Descriptions to 80 MHz.  
Read Memory Array Commands: Changed 66 MHz to 80 MHz throughout section.  
Software Interface Reference: S25FL512S Instruction Set (sorted by instruction)  
table: updated Maximum Frequency (MHz) of DDR Command Descriptions to 80  
MHz.  
*I  
2015-08-24  
Replaced “Automotive Temperature Range” with “Industrial Plus Temperature  
Range” in all instances across the document.  
Updated Section 2:  
Updated Section 2.11:  
Updated description.  
Updated to Cypress template.  
Datasheet  
158 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Revision history  
Document  
Date of release  
version.  
Description of changes  
*J  
2016-09-20  
Added ECC related information in all instances across the document.  
Added “Extended, Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 3, Automotive, AECQ100  
Grade 2, Automotive, AEC-Q100 Grade 1” temperature range related infor-  
mation in all instances across the document.  
Added Logic block diagram.  
Updated Section 4  
Added Section 4.2.  
Updated Section 4.4  
Updated Table 6  
Changed minimum value of VCC (low) parameter from 1.0 V to 1.6 V.  
Changed minimum value of tPD parameter from 1.0 µs to 10.0 µs.  
Updated Section 5  
Updated Section 5.4  
Updated Table 12  
Updated Table 13  
Updated Section 5.5  
Updated Table 14  
Changed minimum value of tHO parameter corresponding to 66 MHz from 0 ns to  
1.5 ns.  
Removed minimum value of tV parameter.  
Updated Section 7  
Updated Section 7.6  
Added Section 7.6.6  
Added Table 18.  
Updated Section 9:  
Updated Section 9.1:  
Updated Section 9.1.1:  
Updated Table 40:  
Updated Section 9.3:  
Updated Section 9.3.7:  
Updated description.  
Added Section 9.3.11.  
Updated Program flash array commands:  
Updated Program granularity:  
Added Automatic ECC.  
Added Data integrity.  
Updated Ordering information:  
No change in part numbers.  
Added Valid combinations — Automotive Grade / AEC-Q100.  
Updated to new template.  
*K  
*L  
2017-03-17  
2017-05-22  
Updated tSU in Table 12.  
Updated Infineon logo and Sales page.  
Remove Extended Temperature Range MPN option Ordering information.  
Updated Package Drawings SOIC 16-lead package, FAB024 24-ball BGA  
package, FAC024 24-ball BGA package.  
Updated Quad page program (QPP 32h or 38h, or 4QPP 34h).  
Added “DP” speed option in Valid combinations — Automotive Grade /  
AEC-Q100.  
Datasheet  
159 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
512 Mb (64 MB) FL-S Flash  
SPI Multi-I/O, 3.0 V  
Revision history  
Document  
Date of release  
version.  
Description of changes  
*M  
2017-11-10  
Updated Table 5.  
Corrected JEDEC Sector Map Parameter Dword-2 in Table 69.  
Updated Ordering information definition of letters in OPN indicating package  
material.  
Updated DDR data valid timing using DLP, Example.  
Updated Package Drawings on Physical interface.  
Change the description of CR1[4] from “RFU” to “DNU” in Table 20.  
*N  
2017-12-15  
Added Model C1 to DP speed option of Valid Combination in Valid combinations  
— Automotive Grade / AEC-Q100.  
Updated Sales page.  
*O  
*P  
*Q  
*R  
2018-03-21  
2018-06-22  
2019-01-23  
2019-04-30  
Table 13 and Table 14: Removed the Max value of tCSH and updated the Max  
value of tSU as “3000.  
Updated Section 5.5.3.  
Updated Package Materials in Section 12.  
Updated FL-S device density in Section 1.2.2.5.  
Updated Thermal resistance.  
Added Device ID and common flash interface (ID-CFI) ASO map — Automotive  
only.  
Updated Glossary.  
*S  
2022-04-11  
Updated Chip select (CS#)  
Updated Thermal resistance  
Updated Valid combinations — Automotive Grade / AEC-Q100  
Migrated to IFX template  
Datasheet  
160 of 161  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
2022-04-11  
Please read the Important Notice and Warnings at the end of this document  
Trademarks  
All referenced product or service names and trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
IMPORTANT NOTICE  
For further information on the product, technology,  
The information given in this document shall in no  
event be regarded as a guarantee of conditions or  
characteristics (“Beschaffenheitsgarantie”).  
Edition 2022-04-11  
Published by  
delivery terms and conditions and prices please  
contact your nearest Infineon Technologies office  
(www.infineon.com).  
Infineon Technologies AG  
81726 Munich, Germany  
With respect to any examples, hints or any typical  
values stated herein and/or any information  
regarding the application of the product, Infineon  
Technologies hereby disclaims any and all  
warranties and liabilities of any kind, including  
without limitation warranties of non-infringement of  
intellectual property rights of any third party.  
WARNINGS  
Due to technical requirements products may contain  
dangerous substances. For information on the types  
in question please contact your nearest Infineon  
Technologies office.  
© 2022 Infineon Technologies AG.  
All Rights Reserved.  
Except as otherwise explicitly approved by Infineon  
Technologies in a written document signed by  
In addition, any information given in this document  
is subject to customer’s compliance with its  
obligations stated in this document and any  
applicable legal requirements, norms and standards  
concerning customer’s products and any use of the  
product of Infineon Technologies in customer’s  
applications.  
Do you have a question about this  
document?  
Go to www.infineon.com/support  
authorized  
representatives  
of  
Infineon  
Technologies, Infineon Technologies’ products may  
not be used in any applications where a failure of the  
product or any consequences of the use thereof can  
reasonably be expected to result in personal injury.  
Document reference  
001-98284 Rev. *S  
The data contained in this document is exclusively  
intended for technically trained staff. It is the  
responsibility of customer’s technical departments  
to evaluate the suitability of the product for the  
intended application and the completeness of the  
product information given in this document with  
respect to such application.  

相关型号:

SI9130DB

5- and 3.3-V Step-Down Synchronous Converters

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135LG-T1

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135LG-T1-E3

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9135_11

SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9136_11

Multi-Output Power-Supply Controller

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130CG-T1-E3

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130LG-T1-E3

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9130_11

Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCs

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137DB

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9137LG

Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile Applications

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY

SI9122E

500-kHz Half-Bridge DC/DC Controller with Integrated Secondary Synchronous Rectification Drivers

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY